diff --git a/data/eng/network/jmail b/data/eng/network/jmail deleted file mode 100644 index c6091335c2..0000000000 Binary files a/data/eng/network/jmail and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/eng/network/zeroconf.ini b/data/eng/network/zeroconf.ini deleted file mode 100644 index 39b2aa5948..0000000000 --- a/data/eng/network/zeroconf.ini +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -[ipconfig] -; type should be static or zeroconf -; zeroconf means the service first tries to contact a DHCP server -; If dhcp is not available, it switches to link-local -type = zeroconf -ip = 10.0.2.15 -gateway = 10.0.2.2 -dns = 10.0.2.2 -subnet = 255.255.255.0 -[proxy] -; If Internet connection requires HTTP proxy, set it here -; and uncomment following lines: -;proxy = -;port = -; If proxy requires authentification, uncomment following lines too -; (otherwise, leave them commented): -;user = -;password= - diff --git a/data/it/Makefile b/data/it/Makefile index a7ca3465d3..02ebbd6648 100644 --- a/data/it/Makefile +++ b/data/it/Makefile @@ -103,7 +103,6 @@ FASM_PROGRAMS:=\ develop/fasm:DEVELOP/FASM:$(PROGS)/develop/fasm/trunk/fasm.asm \ develop/h2d2b:DEVELOP/H2D2B:$(PROGS)/develop/h2d2b/trunk/h2d2b.asm \ develop/heed:DEVELOP/HEED:$(PROGS)/develop/heed/trunk/heed.asm \ - develop/ipc:DEVELOP/IPC:$(PROGS)/network/ipc/trunk/ipc.asm \ develop/keyascii:DEVELOP/KEYASCII:$(PROGS)/develop/keyascii/trunk/keyascii.asm \ develop/mtdbg:DEVELOP/MTDBG:$(PROGS)/develop/mtdbg/mtdbg.asm \ develop/scancode:DEVELOP/SCANCODE:$(PROGS)/develop/scancode/trunk/scancode.asm \ @@ -133,6 +132,19 @@ FASM_PROGRAMS:=\ drivers/usbstor.obj:DRIVERS/USBSTOR.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/usbstor.asm \ drivers/vt823x.obj:DRIVERS/VT823X.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/vt823x.asm \ drivers/vidintel.obj:DRIVERS/VIDINTEL.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/vidintel.asm \ + drivers/3c59x.obj:DRIVERS/3C59X.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/3c59x.asm \ + drivers/dec21x4x.obj:DRIVERS/DEC21X4X.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/dec21x4x.asm \ + drivers/forcedeth.obj:DRIVERS/FORCEDETH.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/forcedeth.asm \ + drivers/i8254x.obj:DRIVERS/I8254X.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/i8254x.asm \ + drivers/i8255x.obj:DRIVERS/I8255X.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/i8255x.asm \ + drivers/mtd80x.obj:DRIVERS/MTD80X.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/mtd80x.asm \ + drivers/pcnet32.obj:DRIVERS/PCNET32.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/pcnet32.asm \ + drivers/r6040.obj:DRIVERS/R6040.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/R6040.asm \ + drivers/rhine.obj:DRIVERS/RHINE.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/rhine.asm \ + drivers/rtl8029.obj:DRIVERS/RTL8029.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/RTL8029.asm \ + drivers/rtl8139.obj:DRIVERS/RTL8139.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/RTL8139.asm \ + drivers/rtl8169.obj:DRIVERS/RTL8169.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/RTL8169.asm \ + drivers/sis900.obj:DRIVERS/SIS900.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/sis900.asm \ File|Managers/kfar:File|Managers/KFAR:$(PROGS)/fs/kfar/trunk/kfar.asm \ File|Managers/kfm:File|Managers/KFM:$(PROGS)/fs/kfm/trunk/kfm.asm \ File|Managers/opendial:File|Managers/OPENDIAL:$(PROGS)/fs/opendial/opendial.asm \ @@ -175,23 +187,18 @@ FASM_PROGRAMS:=\ media/midamp:MEDIA/MIDAMP:$(PROGS)/media/midamp/trunk/midamp.asm \ media/palitra:MEDIA/PALITRA:$(PROGS)/media/palitra/trunk/palitra.asm \ media/startmus:MEDIA/STARTMUS:$(PROGS)/media/startmus/trunk/STARTMUS.ASM \ - network/airc:NETWORK/AIRC:$(PROGS)/network/airc/trunk/airc.asm \ - network/arpstat:NETWORK/ARPSTAT:$(PROGS)/network/arpstat/trunk/arpstat.asm \ - network/chess:NETWORK/CHESS:$(PROGS)/network/chess/trunk/chess.asm \ - network/downloader:NETWORK/DOWNLOADER:$(PROGS)/network/downloader/trunk/downloader.asm \ - network/ethstat:NETWORK/ETHSTAT:$(PROGS)/network/ethstat/trunk/ethstat.asm \ - network/ftps:NETWORK/FTPS:$(PROGS)/network/ftps/trunk/FTPS.ASM \ - network/https:NETWORK/HTTPS:$(PROGS)/network/https/trunk/https.asm \ - network/nntpc:NETWORK/NNTPC:$(PROGS)/network/nntpc/trunk/nntpc.asm \ - network/nslookup:NETWORK/NSLOOKUP:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/network/examples/nslookup.asm \ - network/popc:NETWORK/POPC:$(PROGS)/network/popc/trunk/popc.asm \ - network/smtps:NETWORK/SMTPS:$(PROGS)/network/smtps/trunk/smtps.asm \ - network/stackcfg:NETWORK/STACKCFG:$(PROGS)/network/stackcfg/trunk/stackcfg.asm \ - network/telnet:NETWORK/TELNET:$(PROGS)/network/telnet/trunk/telnet.asm \ - network/tftpc:NETWORK/TFTPC:$(PROGS)/network/tftpc/trunk/tftpc.asm \ - network/VNCclient:NETWORK/VNCclient:$(PROGS)/network/VNCclient/VNCclient.asm \ - network/ym:NETWORK/YM:$(PROGS)/network/ym/trunk/ym.asm \ - network/zeroconf:NETWORK/ZEROCONF:$(PROGS)/network/zeroconf/trunk/zeroconf.asm \ + network/arpcfg:NETWORK/ARPCFG:$(PROGS)/network/arpcfg/arpcfg.asm \ + network/ping:NETWORK/PING:$(PROGS)/network/icmp/ping.asm \ + network/netcfg:NETWORK/NETCFG:$(PROGS)/network/netcfg/netcfg.asm \ + network/netstat:NETWORK/NETSTAT:$(PROGS)/network/netstat/netstat.asm \ + network/nslookup:NETWORK/NSLOOKUP:$(PROGS)/network/nslookup/nslookup.asm \ + network/synergyc:NETWORK/SYNERGYC:$(PROGS)/network/synergyc/synergyc.asm \ + network/tcpserv:NETWORK/TCPSERV:$(PROGS)/network/tcpserv/tcpserv.asm \ + network/telnet:NETWORK/TELNET:$(PROGS)/network/telnet/telnet.asm \ + network/zeroconf:NETWORK/ZEROCONF:$(PROGS)/network/zeroconf/zeroconf.asm \ + network/ftpd:NETWORK/FTPD:$(PROGS)/network/ftpd/ftpd.asm \ + network/tftpc:NETWORK/TFTPC:$(PROGS)/network/tftpc/tftpc.asm \ + network/ircc:NETWORK/IRCC:$(PROGS)/network/ircc/ircc.asm \ # end of list # The list of all FASM programs with one main FASM file for CD image. # Format of an item is exactly the same as in the previous list. @@ -298,7 +305,7 @@ OTHER_FILES:=autorun.dat:AUTORUN.DAT \ media/ImgF/cEdg.obj:MEDIA/ImgF/cEdg.obj \ media/ImgF/dither.obj:MEDIA/ImgF/dither.obj \ media/ImgF/invSol.obj:MEDIA/ImgF/invSol.obj \ - network/jmail:NETWORK/JMAIL network/zeroconf.ini:NETWORK/ZEROCONF.INI \ + network.ini:NETWORK.INI \ #end of list # Generate skins list understandable by gnu make diff --git a/data/it/autorun.dat b/data/it/autorun.dat index a53468d052..c5914a45b8 100644 --- a/data/it/autorun.dat +++ b/data/it/autorun.dat @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ #/RD/1/COMMOUSE "" 1 # COM mice detector #/RD/1/DEVELOP/BOARD "" 1 # Load DEBUG board #/RD/1/refrscrn "" 1 # Refresh screen +/RD/1/NETWORK/NETCFG A 1 # /RD/1/NETWORK/ZEROCONF "" 1 # Network configuration /RD/1/MEDIA/PALITRA "H 007DCEDF 003C427F" 1 #SET BG /RD/1/@PANEL "" 1 # Start panel diff --git a/data/it/menu.dat b/data/it/menu.dat index 57bf7c0b31..da79b3113c 100644 --- a/data/it/menu.dat +++ b/data/it/menu.dat @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -#0 **** MAIN **** +#0 **** MAIN **** Giochi > /@1 Demo > /@4 Grafica > /@6 @@ -127,27 +127,19 @@ Hex-Editor /rd/1/develop/heed #15 **** NET **** Servers > /@16 Clients > /@17 -Configurazione /rd/1/network/stackcfg -Zero-Config /rd/1/network/zeroconf -Network status /rd/1/network/ethstat -ARP status /rd/1/network/arpstat +Zero-Config /sys/network/zeroconf +network Config /sys/network/netcfg +Network status /sys/network/netstat +ARP status /sys/network/arpcfg #16 **** SERVERS **** -SMTPS /rd/1/network/smtps -HTTPS /rd/1/network/https -FTPS /rd/1/network/ftps +FTP daemon /sys/network/ftpd #17 **** CLIENTS **** -TFTP client /rd/1/network/tftpc -Internet-chess /rd/1/network/chess -Internet downloader /rd/1/network/downloader -Text-based browser /rd/1/htmlv -NNTP-NewsGroups /rd/1/network/nntpc -TELNET /rd/1/network/telnet -POP - MAIL /rd/1/network/popc -Client IRC /rd/1/network/airc -YAHOO messenger (demo) /rd/1/network/ym -JMail /rd/1/network/jmail -VNC client /rd/1/network/vncclient -DNS resolver /rd/1/network/nslookup +IRC client /sys/network/ircc +TFTP client /sys/network/tftpc +Ping /sys/network/ping +Telnet client /sys/network/telnet +Synergy client /sys/network/synergyc +DNS lookup /sys/network/nslookup #18 **** OTHER **** Orologio analogico /rd/1/demos/aclock Orologio binario /rd/1/demos/bcdclk diff --git a/data/it/network.ini b/data/it/network.ini new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e37d2279f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/network.ini @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +[ipconfig] +; type should be static or zeroconf +; zeroconf means the service first tries to contact a DHCP server +; If dhcp is not available, it switches to link-local +type = zeroconf +ip = 192.168.1.150 +gateway = 192.168.1.1 +dns = 192.168.1.1 +subnet = 255.255.255.0 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/it/network/jmail b/data/it/network/jmail deleted file mode 100644 index c6091335c2..0000000000 Binary files a/data/it/network/jmail and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/it/network/zeroconf.ini b/data/it/network/zeroconf.ini deleted file mode 100644 index 39b2aa5948..0000000000 --- a/data/it/network/zeroconf.ini +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -[ipconfig] -; type should be static or zeroconf -; zeroconf means the service first tries to contact a DHCP server -; If dhcp is not available, it switches to link-local -type = zeroconf -ip = 10.0.2.15 -gateway = 10.0.2.2 -dns = 10.0.2.2 -subnet = 255.255.255.0 -[proxy] -; If Internet connection requires HTTP proxy, set it here -; and uncomment following lines: -;proxy = -;port = -; If proxy requires authentification, uncomment following lines too -; (otherwise, leave them commented): -;user = -;password= - diff --git a/data/new-stack/File Managers/eolite.ini b/data/new-stack/File Managers/eolite.ini deleted file mode 100644 index 4fd8834f8b..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/File Managers/eolite.ini +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ -[Associations] -asm=TinyPad -inc=TinyPad -ini=TinyPad -txt=TinyPad -gif=/sys/media/kiv -bmp=/sys/media/kiv -png=/sys/media/kiv -tga=/sys/media/kiv -jpg=/sys/media/kiv -jpeg=/sys/media/kiv -ico=/sys/media/kiv -cur=/sys/media/kiv -pcx=/sys/media/kiv -xcf=/sys/media/kiv -pbm=/sys/media/kiv -pgm=/sys/media/kiv -pnm=/sys/media/kiv -tif=/sys/media/kiv -tiff=/sys/media/kiv -wbmp=/sys/media/kiv -3ds=/sys/3d/view3ds -lif=/sys/demos/life2 -skn=/sys/desktop -htm=/sys/HTMLv -html=/sys/HTMLv -mht=/sys/HTMLv -fb2=/sys/HTMLv -rtf=/sys/RtfRead -obj=/sys/develop/cObj -sna=/sys/e80 -nes=/sys/games/fceu -xm=/sys/media/AC97SND -wav=/sys/media/AC97SND -mp3=/sys/media/AC97SND -mid=/sys/media/MIDAMP -m3u=/sys/media/listplay -lap=/sys/media/listplay -asf=/sys/media/listplay -kla=/sys/games/klavisha -avi=/bd0/4/fplay -mkv=/bd0/4/fplay -vob=/bd0/4/fplay -flv=/bd0/4/fplay -mp4=/bd0/4/fplay -mpg=/bd0/4/fplay -mpeg=/bd0/4/fplay -smc=/bd0/4/zsnes -pdf=/bd0/4/updf -mcr=/bd0/4/psx4all - -[Config] -SelectionColor=94AECE -LineHeight=18 -ShowDeviceName=1 - -[UserDirectories] -;ïàïêè äëÿ áûñòðîãî ïåðåõîäà - ïîêà ÷òî íå ðàáîòàåò -/bd0/4/kolibri/ - diff --git a/data/new-stack/File Managers/icons.ini b/data/new-stack/File Managers/icons.ini deleted file mode 100644 index 26c015a42d..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/File Managers/icons.ini +++ /dev/null @@ -1,143 +0,0 @@ -asm=4 -inc=4 -txt=3 -rtf=3 -ini=3 -log=3 -dic=3 -doc=3 -exc=3 -wtx=3 -inf=3 -xml=3 -odt=3 -jpg=6 -jpe=6 -jpeg=6 -jif=6 -jfif=6 -jp2=6 -jpx=6 -jpk=6 -j2k=6 -jpc=6 -j2c=6 -bmp=6 -dib=6 -rle=6 -pbm=6 -pgm=6 -pnm=6 -wbm=6 -wbmp=6 -xbm=6 -xpm=6 -gif=6 -png=6 -ico=6 -cur=6 -ani=6 -tif=6 -tiff=6 -xif=6 -tga=6 -pcx=6 -xcf=6 -dcx=6 -ppm=6 -psd=6 -psp=6 -raw=6 -raf=6 -x3f=6 -orf=6 -nef=6 -mrw=6 -dcr=6 -crw=6 -cr2=6 -ras=6 -pix=6 -pict=6 -pct=6 -pic=6 -pef=6 -pcd=6 -iff=6 -lbm=6 -ilbm=6 -fpx=6 -djv=6 -djvu=6 -iw4=6 -wav=7 -mp3=7 -xm=7 -mid=7 -midi=7 -aif=7 -aifc=7 -aiff=7 -au=7 -snd=7 -wma=7 -wm=7 -avi=11 -mpg=11 -mpe=11 -mpeg=11 -flv=11 -3gp=11 -mkv=11 -wmv=11 -mov=11 -mp4=11 -img=5 -ima=5 -imz=5 -bwz=5 -dsk=5 -vfd=5 -wil=5 -wlz=5 -exe=8 -com=8 -bat=8 -7z=9 -rar=9 -zip=9 -cab=9 -arj=9 -lha=9 -lzh=9 -tar=9 -taz=9 -tbz=9 -tbz2=9 -bz=9 -bz2=9 -ice=9 -gz=9 -tgz=9 -uue=9 -uu=9 -xxe=9 -z=9 -dat=10 -ttf=12 -ttc=12 -chr=12 -mt=12 -htm=13 -html=13 -mht=13 -eml=13 -lif=14 -3ds=15 -kex=16 -skn=17 -obj=18 -dll=18 -ocx=18 -so=18 -drv=18 diff --git a/data/new-stack/File Managers/kfar.ini b/data/new-stack/File Managers/kfar.ini deleted file mode 100644 index d5848a1973..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/File Managers/kfar.ini +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ -[Associations] -asm=/sys/TinyPad; AsmMenu1,AsmMenu2 -inc=/sys/TinyPad -ini=/sys/TinyPad -txt=/sys/TinyPad -jpg=/sys/media/kiv -jpeg=/sys/media/kiv -gif=/sys/media/kiv; ViewGraph,MenuAnimage -wav=/sys/media/AC97SND -mp3=/sys/media/AC97SND -xm=/sys/media/AC97SND -mid=/sys/media/MIDAMP -bmp=/sys/media/kiv; ViewGraph,MenuAnimage -png=/sys/media/kiv -ico=/sys/media/kiv -cur=/sys/media/kiv -pcx=/sys/media/kiv -xcf=/sys/media/kiv -pbm=/sys/media/kiv -pgm=/sys/media/kiv -pnm=/sys/media/kiv -tif=/sys/media/kiv -tiff=/sys/media/kiv -wbmp=/sys/media/kiv -rtf=/sys/RtfRead -3ds=/sys/3d/view3ds -lif=/sys/demos/life2 -skn=/sys/desktop -m3u=/sys/media/listplay -lap=/sys/media/listplay -asf=/sys/media/listplay -cvs=/sys/graph -obj=/sys/develop/cObj -nes=/sys/fceu -sna=/sys/e80 -htm=/sys/HTMLv -html=/sys/HTMLv -fb2=/sys/HTMLv - - -[Menu] -AsmMenu1=&Edit,/sys/TinyPad -AsmMenu2=&Compile,/sys/develop/fasm -ViewGraph=&View,/sys/media/kiv -MenuAnimage=&Edit,/sys/media/animage - -[Panels] -; View modes for files on panels -; values correspond to digits for LCtrl+<1-4> -LeftViewMode=2 -RightViewMode=2 -; Sort modes for files on panels -; values are 2 * N + M, where -; M = 0 - normal sorting, M = 1 - reverse sorting -; N = 0-6 correspond to sort mode for Ctrl+F<3-9> -LeftSortMode=0 -RightSortMode=0 - -[Editor] -; Symbols for end-of-line, which will be added by kfar editor -; when new line will be created: -; DOS - like in DOS/Win (0D 0A), Unix - like in Unix (0A), -; Mac - like in Mac (0D) -EOLStyle=Unix - -[FolderShortcuts] -; You can define up to 10 links to folders Shortcut0...Shortcut9, -; the quick jump to such folders can be done with RCtrl+ -Shortcut0=/rd/1 - -[Confirmations] -Delete=1 -DeleteIncomplete=0 - -[Plugins] -; On left of the equal sign any sensical or nonsensical name can appear; -; on right - path to plugin. -; If path is not absolute, it is counted from the folder with kfar binary. -ArchiveReader=/sys/lib/archiver.obj diff --git a/data/new-stack/File Managers/kfm.ini b/data/new-stack/File Managers/kfm.ini deleted file mode 100644 index dc8c6c4505..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/File Managers/kfm.ini +++ /dev/null @@ -1,199 +0,0 @@ -start -<>icons_associations -asm 0004 -inc 0004 -txt 0003 -rtf 0003 -ini 0003 -log 0003 -dic 0003 -doc 0003 -exc 0003 -wtx 0003 -inf 0003 -jpg 0006 -jpe 0006 -jpeg 0006 -jif 0006 -jfif 0006 -jp2 0006 -jpx 0006 -jpk 0006 -j2k 0006 -jpc 0006 -j2c 0006 -bmp 0006 -dib 0006 -rle 0006 -wbm 0006 -wbmp 0006 -xbm 0006 -xpm 0006 -gif 0006 -png 0006 -ico 0006 -cur 0006 -ani 0006 -tif 0006 -tiff 0006 -xif 0006 -tga 0006 -pcx 0006 -pbm 0006 -pgm 0006 -pnm 0006 -xcf 0006 -dcx 0006 -ppm 0006 -psd 0006 -psp 0006 -raw 0006 -raf 0006 -x3f 0006 -orf 0006 -nef 0006 -mrw 0006 -dcr 0006 -crw 0006 -cr2 0006 -ras 0006 -pix 0006 -pict 0006 -pct 0006 -pic 0006 -pef 0006 -pcd 0006 -iff 0006 -lbm 0006 -ilbm 0006 -fpx 0006 -djv 0006 -djvu 0006 -iw4 0006 -wav 0007 -mp3 0007 -xm 0007 -mid 0007 -midi 0007 -aif 0007 -aifc 0007 -aiff 0007 -au 0007 -snd 0007 -wma 0007 -wm 0007 -avi 0011 -mpg 0011 -mov 0011 -flv 0011 -wmv 0011 -vob 0011 -mkv 0011 -mp4 0011 -mpeg 0011 -3gp 0011 -img 0005 -ima 0005 -imz 0005 -bwz 0005 -dsk 0005 -vfd 0005 -wil 0005 -wlz 0005 -exe 0008 -com 0008 -bat 0008 -7z 0009 -rar 0009 -zip 0009 -cab 0009 -arj 0009 -lha 0009 -lzh 0009 -tar 0009 -taz 0009 -tbz 0009 -tbz2 0009 -bz 0009 -bz2 0009 -ice 0009 -gz 0009 -tgz 0009 -uue 0009 -uu 0009 -xxe 0009 -z 0009 -dat 0010 -ttf 0012 -ttc 0012 -chr 0012 -mt 0012 -htm 0013 -html 0013 -lif 0014 -3ds 0015 -kex 0016 -skn 0017 -<>end - -<>files_associations -asm /sys/tinypad -inc /sys/tinypad -txt /sys/tinypad -ini /sys/tinypad -log /sys/tinypad -dat /sys/tinypad -inf /sys/tinypad -bat /sys/tinypad -jpg /sys/media/kiv -jpeg /sys/media/kiv -jpe /sys/media/kiv -gif /sys/media/kiv -wav /sys/media/ac97snd -mp3 /sys/media/ac97snd -xm /sys/media/ac97snd -mid /sys/media/midamp -bmp /sys/media/kiv -png /sys/media/kiv -ico /sys/media/kiv -cur /sys/media/kiv -pcx /sys/media/kiv -xcf /sys/media/kiv -pbm /sys/media/kiv -pgm /sys/media/kiv -pnm /sys/media/kiv -tif /sys/media/kiv -tiff /sys/media/kiv -wbmp /sys/media/kiv -rtf /sys/rtfread -3ds /sys/3d/view3ds -lif /sys/demos/life2 -skn /sys/desktop -avi /hd0/1/fplay.kex -mpg /hd0/1/fplay.kex -mov /hd0/1/fplay.kex -flv /hd0/1/fplay.kex -wmv /hd0/1/fplay.kex -vob /hd0/1/fplay.kex -mkv /hd0/1/fplay.kex -mp4 /hd0/1/fplay.kex -mpeg /hd0/1/fplay.kex -3gp /hd0/1/fplay.kex -m3u /sys/media/listplay -lap /sys/media/listplay -asf /sys/media/listplay -cvs /sys/graph -obj /sys/develop/cObj -nes /sys/fceu -sna /sys/e80 -htm /sys/HTMLv -html /sys/HTMLv -fb2 /sys/HTMLv -kla /sys/games/klavisha -<>end - -<>files_association1 -bmp /sys/media/animage -<>end - -end diff --git a/data/new-stack/Makefile b/data/new-stack/Makefile deleted file mode 100644 index fe32db9491..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/Makefile +++ /dev/null @@ -1,392 +0,0 @@ -# General rule for naming: variables with CAPITALIZED names hold settings, -# you can - and are expected - to modify it; variables with lowercase names -# are intermediate variables and macroses not to be modified unless you -# know what you're doing. - -# Define directories for destination, source repository, sources of kernel, sources of programs. -BUILD_DIR:=build -REPOSITORY:=../.. -KERNEL:=$(REPOSITORY)/kernel/branches/net -TRUNKKERNEL:=$(REPOSITORY)/kernel/trunk -PROGS:=$(REPOSITORY)/programs -NETPROGS:=$(REPOSITORY)/kernel/branches/net/applications - -# Docpak requires some documents; we place them -# into 'docs' subdir and communicate with FASM -# through environment var DOCDIR. -DOCDIR:=docs/ -export DOCDIR - -# Because most programs are written in FASM and have -# the common structure of one main .asm file possibly including -# several .inc files, we handle this case separately. -# Namely, we organize one big list of such programs -# (FASM_PROGRAMS, see below) containing name of local binary file, -# name of file inside kolibri.img and name of the source file. -# This list is maintained by hand, and the rest is done with some macroses... -# well, slightly complicated macroses - however, you do not need to -# understand them in order to maintain the list. -# To add a FASM program with one .asm file, just -# add the corresponding item to the list and enjoy -# the power of GNU make. - -# The list of all FASM programs with one main FASM file. -# Every item consists of three parts, separated by ':'. -# First part is the real name of binary file in $(BUILD_DIR) -# as it should be produced by make. -# Second part is the name of a file inside kolibri.img, -# usually uppercased version of first part - to save space -# for FAT filesystem. -# Third part is the name of the source file. -# Spaces separate items, so spaces in names should be -# represented as '|'. -FASM_PROGRAMS:=\ - @panel:@PANEL:$(PROGS)/system/panel/trunk/@PANEL.ASM \ - @clip:@CLIP:$(PROGS)/system/clip/trunk/@clip.ASM \ - @menu:@MENU:$(PROGS)/system/menu/trunk/menu.asm \ - @ss:@SS:$(PROGS)/system/ss/trunk/@ss.asm\ - refrscrn:REFRSCRN:$(PROGS)/system/refrscrn/refrscrn.asm \ - asciivju:ASCIIVJU:$(PROGS)/develop/asciivju/trunk/asciivju.asm \ - calc:CALC:$(PROGS)/other/calc/trunk/calc.asm \ - calendar:CALENDAR:$(PROGS)/system/calendar/trunk/calendar.asm \ - colrdial:COLRDIAL:$(PROGS)/system/colrdial/color_dialog.asm \ - commouse:COMMOUSE:$(PROGS)/system/commouse/trunk/commouse.asm \ - cpu:CPU:$(PROGS)/system/cpu/trunk/cpu.asm \ - cpuid:CPUID:$(PROGS)/system/cpuid/trunk/CPUID.ASM \ - desktop:DESKTOP:$(PROGS)/system/desktop/trunk/desktop.asm \ - disptest:DISPTEST:$(PROGS)/system/disptest/trunk/disptest.ASM \ - docpack:DOCPACK:$(PROGS)/system/docpack/trunk/docpack.asm \ - end:END:$(PROGS)/system/end/light/end.asm \ - gmon:GMON:$(PROGS)/system/gmon/gmon.asm \ - hdd_info:HDD_INFO:$(PROGS)/system/hdd_info/trunk/hdd_info.asm \ - icon:ICON:$(PROGS)/system/icon/trunk/icon.asm \ - kbd:KBD:$(PROGS)/system/kbd/trunk/kbd.ASM \ - kpack:KPACK:$(PROGS)/other/kpack/trunk/kpack.asm \ - launcher:LAUNCHER:$(PROGS)/system/launcher/trunk/launcher.asm \ - magnify:MAGNIFY:$(PROGS)/demos/magnify/trunk/magnify.asm \ - mgb:MGB:$(PROGS)/system/mgb/trunk/mgb.asm \ - mousemul:MOUSEMUL:$(PROGS)/system/mousemul/trunk/mousemul.asm \ - madmouse:MADMOUSE:$(PROGS)/other/madmouse/madmouse.asm \ - mykey:MYKEY:$(PROGS)/system/MyKey/trunk/MyKey.asm \ - pcidev:PCIDEV:$(PROGS)/system/pcidev/trunk/PCIDEV.ASM \ - rdsave:RDSAVE:$(PROGS)/system/rdsave/trunk/rdsave.asm \ - rtfread:RTFREAD:$(PROGS)/other/rtfread/trunk/rtfread.asm \ - run:RUN:$(PROGS)/system/run/trunk/run.asm \ - scrshoot:SCRSHOOT:$(PROGS)/media/scrshoot/scrshoot.asm \ - setup:SETUP:$(PROGS)/system/setup/trunk/setup.asm \ - test:TEST:$(PROGS)/system/test/trunk/test.asm \ - tinypad:TINYPAD:$(PROGS)/develop/tinypad/trunk/tinypad.asm \ - zkey:ZKEY:$(PROGS)/system/zkey/trunk/ZKEY.ASM \ - develop/board:DEVELOP/BOARD:$(PROGS)/system/board/trunk/board.asm \ - develop/cObj:DEVELOP/cObj:$(PROGS)/develop/cObj/trunk/cObj.asm \ - develop/fasm:DEVELOP/FASM:$(PROGS)/develop/fasm/trunk/fasm.asm \ - develop/h2d2b:DEVELOP/H2D2B:$(PROGS)/develop/h2d2b/trunk/h2d2b.asm \ - develop/heed:DEVELOP/HEED:$(PROGS)/develop/heed/trunk/heed.asm \ - develop/ipc:DEVELOP/IPC:$(PROGS)/network/ipc/trunk/ipc.asm \ - develop/keyascii:DEVELOP/KEYASCII:$(PROGS)/develop/keyascii/trunk/keyascii.asm \ - develop/mtdbg:DEVELOP/MTDBG:$(PROGS)/develop/mtdbg/mtdbg.asm \ - develop/scancode:DEVELOP/SCANCODE:$(PROGS)/develop/scancode/trunk/scancode.asm \ - develop/t_edit:DEVELOP/T_EDIT:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/t_edit.asm \ - develop/test_gets:DEVELOP/test_gets:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/console/examples/test_gets.asm \ - develop/testcon2:DEVELOP/TESTCON2:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/console/examples/testcon2.asm \ - develop/thread:DEVELOP/THREAD:$(PROGS)/develop/examples/thread/trunk/thread.asm \ - drivers/com_mouse.obj:DRIVERS/COM_MOUSE.OBJ:$(TRUNKKERNEL)/drivers/com_mouse.asm \ - drivers/emu10k1x.obj:DRIVERS/EMU10K1X.OBJ:$(TRUNKKERNEL)/drivers/emu10k1x.asm \ - drivers/fm801.obj:DRIVERS/FM801.OBJ:$(TRUNKKERNEL)/drivers/fm801.asm \ - drivers/infinity.obj:DRIVERS/INFINITY.OBJ:$(TRUNKKERNEL)/drivers/infinity.asm \ - drivers/ps2mouse.obj:DRIVERS/PS2MOUSE.OBJ:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/mouse/ps2mouse4d/trunk/ps2mouse.asm \ - drivers/sb16.obj:DRIVERS/SB16.OBJ:$(TRUNKKERNEL)/drivers/sb16/sb16.asm \ - drivers/sound.obj:DRIVERS/SOUND.OBJ:$(TRUNKKERNEL)/drivers/sound.asm \ - drivers/intelac97.obj:DRIVERS/INTELAC97.OBJ:$(TRUNKKERNEL)/drivers/intelac97.asm \ - drivers/vt823x.obj:DRIVERS/VT823X.OBJ:$(TRUNKKERNEL)/drivers/vt823x.asm \ - drivers/tmpdisk.obj:DRIVERS/TMPDISK.OBJ:$(TRUNKKERNEL)/drivers/tmpdisk.asm \ - File|Managers/kfar:File|Managers/KFAR:$(PROGS)/fs/kfar/trunk/kfar.asm \ - File|Managers/kfm:File|Managers/KFM:$(PROGS)/fs/kfm/trunk/kfm.asm \ - File|Managers/opendial:File|Managers/OPENDIAL:$(PROGS)/fs/opendial/opendial.asm \ - develop/info/asm.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/ASM.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/asm_syn.asm \ - develop/info/cpp_kol_cla.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/CPP_KOL_CLA.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/cpp_kol_cla_syn.asm \ - develop/info/cpp_kol_dar.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/CPP_KOL_DAR.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/cpp_kol_dar_syn.asm \ - develop/info/cpp_kol_def.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/CPP_KOL_DEF.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/cpp_kol_def_syn.asm \ - develop/info/default.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/DEFAULT.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/default_syn.asm \ - develop/info/html.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/HTML.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/html_syn.asm \ - develop/info/ini_files.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/INI_FILES.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/ini_files_syn.asm \ - develop/info/win_const.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/WIN_CONST.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/win_const_syn.asm \ - lib/archiver.obj:LIB/ARCHIVER.OBJ:$(PROGS)/fs/kfar/trunk/kfar_arc/kfar_arc.asm \ - lib/box_lib.obj:LIB/BOX_LIB.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/box_lib/trunk/box_lib.asm \ - lib/buf2d.obj:LIB/BUF2D.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/buf2d/trunk/buf2d.asm \ - lib/console.obj:LIB/CONSOLE.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/console/console.asm \ - lib/libgfx.obj:LIB/LIBGFX.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/libs-dev/libgfx/libgfx.asm \ - lib/libimg.obj:LIB/LIBIMG.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/libs-dev/libimg/libimg.asm \ - lib/libini.obj:LIB/LIBINI.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/libs-dev/libini/libini.asm \ - lib/libio.obj:LIB/LIBIO.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/libs-dev/libio/libio.asm \ - lib/proc_lib.obj:LIB/PROC_LIB.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/proc_lib/trunk/proc_lib.asm \ - lib/cnv_png.obj:LIB/CNV_PNG.OBJ:$(PROGS)/media/zsea/plugins/png/cnv_png.asm \ - media/animage:MEDIA/ANIMAGE:$(PROGS)/media/animage/trunk/animage.asm \ - media/cdp:MEDIA/CDP:$(PROGS)/media/cdp/trunk/cdp.asm \ - media/kiv:MEDIA/KIV:$(PROGS)/media/kiv/trunk/kiv.asm \ - media/listplay:MEDIA/LISTPLAY:$(PROGS)/media/listplay/trunk/listplay.asm \ - media/midamp:MEDIA/MIDAMP:$(PROGS)/media/midamp/trunk/midamp.asm \ - media/palitra:MEDIA/PALITRA:$(PROGS)/media/palitra/trunk/palitra.asm \ - media/startmus:MEDIA/STARTMUS:$(PROGS)/media/startmus/trunk/STARTMUS.ASM \ - network/arpcfg:NETWORK/ARPCFG:$(NETPROGS)/arpcfg/arpcfg.asm \ - network/ping:NETWORK/PING:$(NETPROGS)/icmp/ping.asm \ - network/netcfg:NETWORK/NETCFG:$(NETPROGS)/netcfg/netcfg.asm \ - network/netstat:NETWORK/NETSTAT:$(NETPROGS)/netstat/netstat.asm \ - network/nslookup:NETWORK/NSLOOKUP:$(NETPROGS)/nslookup/nslookup.asm \ - network/synergyc:NETWORK/SYNERGYC:$(NETPROGS)/synergyc/synergyc.asm \ - network/tcpserv:NETWORK/TCPSERV:$(NETPROGS)/tcpserv/tcpserv.asm \ - network/telnet:NETWORK/TELNET:$(NETPROGS)/telnet/telnet.asm \ - network/zeroconf:NETWORK/ZEROCONF:$(NETPROGS)/zeroconf/zeroconf.asm \ - network/ftpd:NETWORK/FTPD:$(NETPROGS)/ftpd/ftpd.asm \ - network/tftpc:NETWORK/TFTPC:$(NETPROGS)/tftpc/tftpc.asm \ - network/ircc:NETWORK/IRCC:$(NETPROGS)/ircc/ircc.asm \ - lib/network.obj:LIB/NETWORK.OBJ:$(NETPROGS)/libraries/network/network.asm \ - drivers/3c59x.obj:DRIVERS/3C59X.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/3c59x.asm \ - drivers/dec21x4x.obj:DRIVERS/DEC21X4X.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/dec21x4x.asm \ - drivers/i8255x.obj:DRIVERS/I8255X.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/i8255x.asm \ - drivers/mtd80x.obj:DRIVERS/MTD80X.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/mtd80x.asm \ - drivers/pcnet32.obj:DRIVERS/PCNET32.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/pcnet32.asm \ - drivers/r6040.obj:DRIVERS/R6040.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/R6040.asm \ - drivers/rtl8029.obj:DRIVERS/RTL8029.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/RTL8029.asm \ - drivers/rtl8139.obj:DRIVERS/RTL8139.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/RTL8139.asm \ - drivers/rtl8169.obj:DRIVERS/RTL8169.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/RTL8169.asm \ - drivers/sis900.obj:DRIVERS/SIS900.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/sis900.asm \ - drivers/i8254x.obj:DRIVERS/I8254X.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/i8254x.asm \ - drivers/rhine.obj:DRIVERS/RHINE.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/rhine.asm \ -# end of list - -# The list of files which should be copied from somewhere. -# Format of an item is exactly the same as in the previous list. -COPY_FILES:=\ - macros.inc:MACROS.INC:$(PROGS)/macros.inc \ - config.inc:CONFIG.INC:$(PROGS)/config.inc \ - struct.inc:STRUCT.INC:$(PROGS)/struct.inc \ - develop/te_icon.png:DEVELOP/TE_ICON.PNG:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/te_icon.png \ - develop/tl_nod_16.png:DEVELOP/TL_NOD_16.PNG:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/tl_nod_16.png \ - develop/tl_sys_16.png:DEVELOP/TL_SYS_16.PNG:$(PROGS)/media/log_el/trunk/tl_sys_16.png \ - develop/t_edit.ini:DEVELOP/T_EDIT.INI:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/t_edit.ini \ - File|Managers/z_icons.png:File|Managers/Z_ICONS.PNG:$(PROGS)/fs/opendial/z_icons.png \ - File|Managers/kfm_keys.txt:File|Managers/KFM_KEYS.TXT:$(PROGS)/fs/kfm/trunk/docs/english/kfm_keys.txt \ - File|Managers/buttons.bmp:File|Managers/BUTTONS.BMP:$(PROGS)/fs/kfm/trunk/buttons.bmp \ - File|Managers/icons.bmp:File|Managers/ICONS.BMP:$(PROGS)/fs/kfm/trunk/icons.bmp \ - media/kiv.ini:MEDIA/KIV.INI:$(PROGS)/media/kiv/trunk/kiv.ini \ - .shell:.shell:$(PROGS)/system/shell/bin/eng/.shell \ - mykey.ini:MYKEY.INI:$(PROGS)/system/MyKey/trunk/mykey.ini \ -# end of list - -# The list of all C-- programs with one main C-- file. -# Format of an item is exactly the same as in the previous list, -# except that there can be fourth field with parameters for a compiler. -CMM_PROGRAMS:=\ - File|Managers/eolite:File|Managers/EOLITE:$(PROGS)/cmm/eolite/Eolite.c \ - HTMLv:HTMLv:$(PROGS)/cmm/browser/HTMLv.c \ - tmpdisk:tmpdisk:$(PROGS)/cmm/tmpdisk/tmpdisk.c \ - @notify:@notify:$(PROGS)/cmm/notify/notify.c \ - @rb:@rb:$(PROGS)/cmm/rb/rb.c \ -#develop/c--:DEVELOP/C--:$(PROGS)/develop/c--/trunk/32.c-- \ -# end of list - -# List of other files to be included in the image file. -# Some of them are auto-built with special rules, some just exist before build. -# Each item is of the form :. -# Spaces should be represented as |. -OTHER_FILES:=autorun.dat:AUTORUN.DAT \ - background.png:background.png default.skn:DEFAULT.SKN \ - icons.dat:ICONS.DAT iconstrp.png:ICONSTRP.PNG index_htm:INDEX.HTM \ - kernel.mnt:KERNEL.MNT kerpack:KERPACK keymap.key:KEYMAP.KEY \ - lang.inc:LANG.INC lang.ini:LANG.INI \ - menu.dat:MENU.DAT \ - panel.ini:PANEL.INI setup.dat:SETUP.DAT \ - shell:SHELL \ - vmode:VMODE \ - File|Managers/eolite.ini:File|Managers/EOLITE.INI \ - File|Managers/icons.ini:File|Managers/ICONS.INI \ - File|Managers/kfar.ini:File|Managers/KFAR.INI \ - File|Managers/kfm.ini:File|Managers/KFM.INI \ - fonts/char2.mt:FONTS/CHAR2.MT \ - fonts/char.mt:FONTS/CHAR.MT \ - lib/msgbox.obj:LIB/MSGBOX.OBJ \ - lib/pixlib.obj:LIB/PIXLIB.OBJ lib/sort.obj:LIB/SORT.OBJ \ - media/ac97snd:MEDIA/AC97SND \ - network.ini:NETWORK.INI \ - network/ftpd.ini:NETWORK/FTPD.INI \ - network/users.ini:NETWORK/USERS.INI \ -#end of list - -# Some macro for convenient work. -# Macros for replacing '|' to escaped space '\ '. -space:=\ #plus space -respace=$(subst |,$(space),$(1)) -# Macro for selecting different parts of ':'-separated items. -binarypart=$(word 1,$(subst :, ,$(1))) -imagepart=$(word 2,$(subst :, ,$(1))) -sourcepart=$(word 3,$(subst :, ,$(1))) -parampart=$(word 4,$(subst :, ,$(1))) -# Get file names, possibly with spaces inside, from an item. -# Here $(f) is an item - in fact, macro argument. -fbinary=$(call respace,$(call binarypart,$(f))) -fimage=$(call respace,$(call imagepart,$(f))) -fsource=$(call respace,$(call sourcepart,$(f))) -fparam=$(call respace,$(call parampart,$(f))) - -# Define targets for image file. -# Join all the lists above. -targets_full:=$(COPY_FILES) $(FASM_PROGRAMS) $(NASM_PROGRAMS) $(OTHER_FILES) $(CMM_PROGRAMS) -# For each item in the united list call fbinary. -targets:=$(foreach f,$(targets_full),$(fbinary)) - -# Define a command for copying a file inside the image. -# mcopy_command is a macro with two parameters, -# local file name $(1) and image file name $(2). -# Note that spaces in these have to be escaped with backslashes. -mcopy_command=mcopy -moi $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img $(1) ::$(2) -# Specialize a previous command for an item $(f) in one of lists. -mcopy_item_command=$(call mcopy_command,$(fbinary),$(fimage)) - -# Join all $(mcopy_item_command) for all items, -# append newline after each item. -# The first newline character after "define" line and -# the last newline character before "endef" line get away -# with define/endef, so we make three newline characters, -# that is two empty lines, in order to get one in $(newline). -define newline - - -endef -mcopy_all_items:=$(foreach f,$(targets_full),$(mcopy_item_command)$(newline)) - -# dependencies of MKISOFS_EXTRA; we iterate through $(MKISOFS_EXTRA), -# substitute "=" with space, get the 2nd word and join all results -mkisofs_extra_targets:=$(foreach f,$(MKISOFS_EXTRA),$(word 2,$(subst =, ,$(f)))) - -# The main goal: build kolibri.img and kolibri.iso -all: $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img - -# The first goal: floppy image. -$(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img: $(BUILD_DIR)/.dir \ - Makefile \ - $(BUILD_DIR)/boot_fat12.bin \ - $(targets) -# SYSXTREE -# 3d/CUBETEXT -# 3d/LOGIO.BMP - str=`date -u +"[auto-build %d %b %Y %R, r$(REV)]"`; \ - echo -n $$str|dd of=kernel.mnt bs=1 seek=`expr 279 - length "$$str"` conv=notrunc 2>/dev/null - dd if=/dev/zero of=$(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img count=2880 bs=512 2>&1 - mformat -f 1440 -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img :: - dd if=$(BUILD_DIR)/boot_fat12.bin of=$(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img count=1 bs=512 conv=notrunc 2>&1 - mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::DEVELOP - mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::DEVELOP/INFO - mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::DRIVERS - mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::File\ Managers - mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::FONTS - mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::LIB - mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::MEDIA - mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::NETWORK - $(mcopy_all_items) - -# Special targets to modify behaviour of make. -.DELETE_ON_ERROR: -.SUFFIXES: # delete all predefined rules - -# The floppy bootsector. -$(BUILD_DIR)/boot_fat12.bin: $(TRUNKKERNEL)/bootloader/boot_fat12.asm $(TRUNKKERNEL)/bootloader/floppy1440.inc - fasm $(TRUNKKERNEL)/bootloader/boot_fat12.asm $(BUILD_DIR)/boot_fat12.bin - -$(BUILD_DIR)/.dir develop/.dir develop/info/.dir drivers/.dir fonts/.dir \ - lib/.dir media/.dir network/.dir .deps/.dir: - mkdir -p $(dir $@) - touch $@ -develop/info/.dir: develop/.dir -File\ Managers/.dir: - mkdir -p "File Managers" - touch "File Managers/.dir" - -# FASM black magic goes to Makefile.fasm. -include Makefile.fasm - -# Similar for NASM. -include Makefile.nasm - -# Similar for copying files. -include Makefile.copy - -# Special rules for copying sysfuncs.txt - it isn't directly included in the image. -docpack: $(DOCDIR)SYSFUNCS.TXT -$(DOCDIR)SYSFUNCS.TXT: $(TRUNKKERNEL)/docs/sysfuncs.txt - cp $(TRUNKKERNEL)/docs/sysfuncs.txt $(DOCDIR)SYSFUNCS.TXT - -# Similar for C--. -include Makefile.cmm - -# Sorry, even black magic seems to be insufficient for -# auto-handling all subtle effects. So we just define -# command lines for compiling and linking, and -# maintain the list of sources and objects by hand. -include Makefile.msvc -include Makefile.gcc - -# Rules for shell -shell: .obj.shell/start.o .obj.shell/shell.o .obj.shell/kolibri.o .obj.shell/stdlib.o .obj.shell/string.o .obj.shell/ctype.o \ - $(PROGS)/system/shell/kolibri.ld - $(call gcc_link,$(PROGS)/system/shell/kolibri.ld) -.obj.shell/shell.o: $(PROGS)/system/shell/shell.c \ - $(PROGS)/system/shell/all.h \ - $(PROGS)/system/shell/system/*.h \ - $(PROGS)/system/shell/cmd/*.c \ - $(PROGS)/system/shell/modules/*.c \ - $(PROGS)/system/shell/locale/rus/globals.h \ - Makefile.gcc | .obj.shell - $(gcc_compile) -.obj.shell/kolibri.o .obj.shell/stdlib.o .obj.shell/string.o .obj.shell/ctype.o: .obj.shell/%.o: \ - $(PROGS)/system/shell/system/%.c $(PROGS)/system/shell/system/*.h \ - Makefile.gcc | .obj.shell - $(gcc_compile) - win32-gcc -c -Os -o $@ $< -.obj.shell/start.o: $(PROGS)/system/shell/start.asm | .obj.shell - fasm $< $@ -.obj.shell: - mkdir -p .obj.shell - -# Rules for sdk/sound, used by media/ac97snd -SOUNDDIR=$(PROGS)/develop/sdk/trunk/sound/src -SOUND_OBJECTS:=$(patsubst $(SOUNDDIR)/%.asm,.sdk/%.obj,$(wildcard $(SOUNDDIR)/*.asm)) -SOUND_INC_FILES:=$(wildcard $(SOUNDDIR)/*.inc) -.sdk/sound.lib: $(SOUND_OBJECTS) - win32-link /lib /out:$@ $^ -$(SOUND_OBJECTS): .sdk/%.obj: $(SOUNDDIR)/%.asm $(SOUND_INC_FILES) | .sdk - fasm $< $@ -.sdk: - mkdir -p .sdk -# Rules for media/ac97snd -AC97DIR=$(PROGS)/media/ac97snd -media/ac97snd: .obj.ac97snd/ac97snd.exe - $(msvc_final) -.obj.ac97snd/ac97snd.exe: .obj.ac97snd/ac97wav.obj .obj.ac97snd/crt.obj .obj.ac97snd/k_lib.obj \ - .obj.ac97snd/mpg.lib .sdk/sound.lib .obj.ac97snd/ufmod.obj - $(msvc_link) -.obj.ac97snd/ac97wav.obj: $(AC97DIR)/ac97snd/ac97wav.c \ - $(AC97DIR)/kolibri.h $(AC97DIR)/ac97snd/ac97wav.h $(AC97DIR)/mpg/mpg123.h \ - $(AC97DIR)/sound.h $(AC97DIR)/ufmod-codec.h Makefile.msvc | .obj.ac97snd - $(msvc_compile) -.obj.ac97snd/crt.obj: $(AC97DIR)/ac97snd/crt.c $(AC97DIR)/ac97snd/crt.h Makefile.msvc | .obj.ac97snd - $(msvc_compile) -.obj.ac97snd/k_lib.obj: $(AC97DIR)/ac97snd/k_lib.asm $(AC97DIR)/ac97snd/proc32.inc | .obj.ac97snd - fasm $< $@ -.obj.ac97snd/ufmod.obj: $(AC97DIR)/ufmod-config.asm | .obj.ac97snd - fasm $< $@ -s .deps/ac97snd-ufmod.fas - prepsrc .deps/ac97snd-ufmod.fas /dev/stdout | \ - perl -n -e 's|\\|/|g;s| |\\ |g;push @a,$$1 if/^;include\\ \x27(.*?)\x27/;' \ - -e 'END{$$a=join " \\\n ",@a;print "$@: $$a\n$$a:\n"}' > .deps/ac97snd-ufmod.Po --include .deps/ac97snd-ufmod.Po -AC97SND_MPG_C_FILES:=$(wildcard $(AC97DIR)/mpg/*.c) -AC97SND_MPG_H_FILES:=$(wildcard $(AC97DIR)/mpg/*.h) -AC97SND_MPG_C_OBJECTS:=$(patsubst $(AC97DIR)/mpg/%.c,.obj.ac97snd/%.o,$(AC97SND_MPG_C_FILES)) -.obj.ac97snd/mpg.lib: $(AC97SND_MPG_C_OBJECTS) .obj.ac97snd/pow.obj - win32-link /lib /ltcg /out:$@ $^ -$(AC97SND_MPG_C_OBJECTS): .obj.ac97snd/%.o: $(AC97DIR)/mpg/%.c $(AC97SND_MPG_H_FILES) Makefile.msvc | .obj.ac97snd - $(msvc_compile) -.obj.ac97snd/pow.obj: $(AC97DIR)/mpg/pow.asm $(AC97DIR)/mpg/proc32.inc | .obj.ac97snd - fasm $< $@ -.obj.ac97snd: - mkdir -p .obj.ac97snd diff --git a/data/new-stack/Makefile.cmm b/data/new-stack/Makefile.cmm deleted file mode 100644 index 561f7e49aa..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/Makefile.cmm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -# This is similar to Makefile.fasm, look there for comments. -# No dependency tracking, so force dependencies on all files -# in dir/* and dir/*/* -# Also, we cannot set output file name and need to guess -# whether c-- has created .com file or no-extension file. -define cmm_meta_rule -$(1): $(2) Makefile.cmm $$(call respace,$$(addsuffix .dir,$(3))) \ - $$(wildcard $$(dir $(2))*) $$(wildcard $$(dir $(2))*/*) - flock $$(dir $(2)).lock -c '\ - (cd "$$(dir $(2))" && win32-c-- /D=AUTOBUILD /D=LANG_ENG $(5) $$(notdir $(2)) >&2) && \ - if [ -e $$(basename $$<) ]; then f=$$(basename $$<); else f=$$(basename $$<).com; fi && \ - kpack --nologo $$$$f "$$@" && rm $$$$f' -endef - -$(foreach f,$(CMM_PROGRAMS),$(eval $(call cmm_meta_rule,$(fbinary),$(fsource),$(binarydir),$(progname),$(fparam)))) diff --git a/data/new-stack/Makefile.copy b/data/new-stack/Makefile.copy deleted file mode 100644 index 538ecb4ef6..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/Makefile.copy +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6 +0,0 @@ -# This is similar to Makefile.fasm, look there for comments. -define copy_meta_rule -$(1): $(2) Makefile.copy $$(call respace,$$(addsuffix .dir,$(3))) - cp $$< "$$@" -endef -$(foreach f,$(COPY_FILES),$(eval $(call copy_meta_rule,$(fbinary),$(fsource),$(binarydir)))) diff --git a/data/new-stack/Makefile.fasm b/data/new-stack/Makefile.fasm deleted file mode 100644 index 8f4c65dca9..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/Makefile.fasm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ -# This is not a independent Makefile; it is auxiliary file -# included from main Makefile. -# It depends on the following variables and macro: -# $(FASM_PROGRAMS) is a list of all programs to build with FASM rule; -# $(binarypart) is a macro which converts from $(1)=item of $(FASM_PROGRAMS) -# to space-escaped full name of binary, $(respace) unescapes spaces; -# $(fbinary) and $(fsource) gives space-unescaped full name of binary -# and source (respectively) of $(f)=item of $(FASM_PROGRAMS). - -# Define the rule for all FASM programs. -# Yes, this looks like a black magic. -# But it is not so scary as it seems. -# First, we define "meta-rule" as a rule which is -# macro depending on $(fasmprog). -# Second, the construction foreach+eval creates -# usual rules, one for each $(fasmprog) in $(FASM_PROGRAMS). -# Note that meta-rule is double-expanded, first -# time as the arg of eval - it is the place where $(fasmprog) -# gets expanded - and second time as the rule; -# so all $ which are expected to expand at the second time should be escaped. -# And all $ which are expected to be expanded by the shell should be escaped -# twice, so they become $$$$. - -# The arguments of macro fasm_meta_rule: -# $(1) = name of binary file, -# $(2) = name of main source file. -# $(3) = folder of binary file - without spaces. -# $(4) = name of program - without path and extension, -define fasm_meta_rule -$(1): $(2) Makefile.fasm .deps/.dir $$(call respace,$$(addsuffix .dir,$(3))) - tmpfile=`mktemp --tmpdir build.XXXXXXXX` && \ - (fasm -m 65536 "$$<" "$$@" -s $$$$tmpfile && \ - fasmdep -e $$$$tmpfile > .deps/$(4).Po && \ - rm $$$$tmpfile) || (rm $$$$tmpfile; false) - kpack --nologo "$$@" --include .deps/$(4).Po -endef - -define fasm_nokpack_meta_rule -$(1): $(2) Makefile.fasm .deps/.dir $$(call respace,$$(addsuffix .dir,$(3))) - tmpfile=`mktemp --tmpdir build.XXXXXXXX` && \ - (fasm -m 65536 "$$<" "$$@" -s $$$$tmpfile && \ - fasmdep -e $$$$tmpfile > .deps/$(4).Po && \ - rm $$$$tmpfile) || (rm $$$$tmpfile; false) --include .deps/$(4).Po -endef - -progname=$(call respace,$(basename $(notdir $(call binarypart,$(f))))) -binarydir=$(subst ./,,$(dir $(call binarypart,$(f)))) -$(foreach f,$(FASM_PROGRAMS) $(FASM_PROGRAMS_CD) $(SKIN_SOURCES),$(eval $(call fasm_meta_rule,$(fbinary),$(fsource),$(binarydir),$(progname)))) -$(foreach f,$(FASM_NOKPACK_PROGRAMS),$(eval $(call fasm_nokpack_meta_rule,$(fbinary),$(fsource),$(binarydir),$(progname)))) - -# Rule for the kernel differs: it uses kerpack instead of kpack. -kernel.mnt: $(KERNEL)/kernel.asm Makefile.fasm .deps/.dir - tmpfile=`mktemp --tmpdir build.XXXXXXXX` && \ - (fasm -m 65536 "$<" "$@" -s $$tmpfile && \ - fasmdep -e $$tmpfile > .deps/kernel.Po && \ - rm $$tmpfile) || (rm $$tmpfile; false) - kerpack "$@" --include .deps/kernel.Po diff --git a/data/new-stack/Makefile.gcc b/data/new-stack/Makefile.gcc deleted file mode 100644 index 14ae973a61..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/Makefile.gcc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -define gcc_compile - win32-gcc -c -Os -DAUTOBUILD -DLANG_ENG=1 -o $@ $< -endef -define gcc_link - win32-ld -nostdlib -T $(1) -o "$@" $^ - win32-objcopy "$@" -O binary - kpack --nologo "$@" -endef diff --git a/data/new-stack/Makefile.msvc b/data/new-stack/Makefile.msvc deleted file mode 100644 index 0902ceed22..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/Makefile.msvc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,13 +0,0 @@ -define msvc_compile -win32-cl /c /O2 /Os /Oy /GF /GS- /GR- /EHs-c- /fp:fast /GL /QIfist /Gr /DAUTOBUILD /Fo$@ Z:$< >&2 -endef -define msvc_link -win32-link /section:.bss,E /fixed:no /subsystem:native \ -/merge:.data=.text /merge:.rdata=.text /merge:.1seg=.text \ -/entry:crtStartUp /out:$@ /ltcg /nodefaultlib \ -$(addprefix Z:,$^) >&2 -endef -define msvc_final -EXENAME=$< fasm doexe2.asm "$@" -kpack --nologo "$@" -endef diff --git a/data/new-stack/Makefile.nasm b/data/new-stack/Makefile.nasm deleted file mode 100644 index cb4714fd21..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/Makefile.nasm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -# This is similar to Makefile.fasm, look there for comments. -define nasm_meta_rule -.deps/$(4).Po: $(2) Makefile.nasm .deps/.dir - nasm -I$$(dir $(2)) -o "$(1)" -M $$< > .deps/$(4).Tpo 2>/dev/null; \ - if [ $$$$? -eq 0 ]; then perl -ln -e 'next unless $$$$_;' \ - -e 'm/((.*): )?(.*)/;$$$$a=$$$$2 if $$$$2;push @b,$$$$3;' \ - -e 'END{$$$$b=join "\n",@b;print "$$$$a .deps/$(4).Po: $$$$b\n$$$$b:"}' \ - .deps/$(4).Tpo > .deps/$(4).Po; fi - rm -f .deps/$(4).Tpo -$(1): $(2) Makefile.nasm $$(call respace,$$(addsuffix .dir,$(3))) - nasm -I$$(dir $(2)) -o "$$@" $$< - kpack --nologo "$$@" --include .deps/$(4).Po -endef - -$(foreach f,$(NASM_PROGRAMS),$(eval $(call nasm_meta_rule,$(fbinary),$(fsource),$(binarydir),$(progname)))) diff --git a/data/new-stack/autorun.dat b/data/new-stack/autorun.dat deleted file mode 100644 index d5cdce3920..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/autorun.dat +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -# Syntaxis is: -# Use "parameter value" for parameters with spaces. Use "" if no parameter is required. -# Delay time means how much the system should wait, before running the next line. It is measured in 1/100 seconds. -# If delay is negative, wait for termination of the spawned process. Otherwise, simply wait -# -/RD/1/refrscrn "" 1 # Refresh screen -/RD/1/COMMOUSE "" 1 # COM mice detector -/RD/1/MEDIA/KIV \T__background.png -1 # Desktop background image -/RD/1/@CLIP "" 1 # Clipboard -/RD/1/@RB "" 1 # Desktop right-click menu -/RD/1/@SS "" 1 # Screensaver -/RD/1/@PANEL "" 1 # Start panel -/RD/1/SETUP BOOT 1 # Load device settings -/RD/1/ICON BOOT 1 # Multithread icon -/RD/1/DEVELOP/BOARD "" 1 # Load DEBUG board -/RD/1/NETWORK/NETCFG A 1 # -/RD/1/NETWORK/ZEROCONF "" 1000 # Network configuration -/RD/1/TMPDISK A1 1 # Add virtual RAM disk /tmp1/1 -### Hello, ASM World! ### diff --git a/data/new-stack/background.png b/data/new-stack/background.png deleted file mode 100644 index 20d0f90f9c..0000000000 Binary files a/data/new-stack/background.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/new-stack/default.skn b/data/new-stack/default.skn deleted file mode 100644 index c7ab605102..0000000000 Binary files a/data/new-stack/default.skn and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/new-stack/docs/COPYING.TXT b/data/new-stack/docs/COPYING.TXT deleted file mode 100644 index f6213b69c6..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/docs/COPYING.TXT +++ /dev/null @@ -1,347 +0,0 @@ - - GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE - - Version 2, June 1991 - - - Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. - 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA - - Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies - of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. - - - Preamble - - The licenses for most software are designed to take away your -freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public -License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free -software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This -General Public License applies to most of the Free Software -Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to -using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by -the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to -your programs, too. - - When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not -price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you -have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for -this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it -if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it -in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. - - To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid -anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. -These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you -distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. - - For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether -gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that -you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the -source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their -rights. - - We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and -(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, -distribute and/or modify the software. - - Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain -that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free -software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we -want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so -that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original -authors' reputations. - - Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software -patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free -program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the -program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any -patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. - - The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and -modification follow. - - - GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE - - TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION - - - 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains -a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed -under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, -refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" -means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: -that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, -either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another -language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in -the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". - -Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not -covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of -running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program -is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the -Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). -Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. - - 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's -source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you -conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate -copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the -notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; -and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License -along with the Program. - -You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and -you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. - - 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion -of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and -distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 -above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: - - a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices - stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. - - b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in - whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any - part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third - parties under the terms of this License. - - c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively - when run, you must cause it, when started running for such - interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an - announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a - notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide - a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under - these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this - License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but - does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on - the Program is not required to print an announcement.) - -These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If -identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, -and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in -themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those -sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you -distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based -on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of -this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the -entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. - -Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest -your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to -exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or -collective works based on the Program. - -In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program -with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of -a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under -the scope of this License. - - 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, -under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of -Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: - - a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable - source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections - 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, - - b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three - years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your - cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete - machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be - distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium - customarily used for software interchange; or, - - c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer - to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is - allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you - received the program in object code or executable form with such - an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) - -The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for -making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source -code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any -associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to -control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a -special exception, the source code distributed need not include -anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary -form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the -operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component -itself accompanies the executable. - -If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering -access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent -access to copy the source code from the same place counts as -distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not -compelled to copy the source along with the object code. - - 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program -except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt -otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is -void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. -However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under -this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such -parties remain in full compliance. - - 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not -signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or -distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are -prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by -modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the -Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and -all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying -the Program or works based on it. - - 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the -Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the -original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to -these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further -restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. -You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to -this License. - - 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent -infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), -conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or -otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not -excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot -distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this -License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you -may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent -license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by -all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then -the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to -refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. - -If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under -any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to -apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other -circumstances. - -It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any -patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any -such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the -integrity of the free software distribution system, which is -implemented by public license practices. Many people have made -generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed -through that system in reliance on consistent application of that -system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing -to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot -impose that choice. - -This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to -be a consequence of the rest of this License. - - 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in -certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the -original copyright holder who places the Program under this License -may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding -those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among -countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates -the limitation as if written in the body of this License. - - 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions -of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will -be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to -address new problems or concerns. - -Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program -specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any -later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions -either of that version or of any later version published by the Free -Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of -this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software -Foundation. - - 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free -programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author -to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free -Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes -make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals -of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and -of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. - - NO WARRANTY - - 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY -FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN -OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES -PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED -OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF -MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS -TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE -PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, -REPAIR OR CORRECTION. - - 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING -WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR -REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, -INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING -OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED -TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY -YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER -PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE -POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. - - END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS - - Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs - - If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest -possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it -free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. - - To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest -to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively -convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least -the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. - - - Copyright (C) 19yy - - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify - it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by - the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or - (at your option) any later version. - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, - but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the - GNU General Public License for more details. - - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License - along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software - Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. - -Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. - -If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this -when it starts in an interactive mode: - - Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author - Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. - This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it - under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. - -The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate -parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may -be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be -mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program. - -You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your -school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if -necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: - - Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program - `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. - - , 1 April 1989 - Ty Coon, President of Vice - -This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into -proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may -consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the -library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General -Public License instead of this License. diff --git a/data/new-stack/docs/FARA.TXT b/data/new-stack/docs/FARA.TXT deleted file mode 100644 index 364a54dc08..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/docs/FARA.TXT +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ - PHARAOH TOMB - -The purpose of the game is to open passage by moving hieroglyphs on entrance -in the next room of the pharaoh tomb (8X8). You can exchange two hieroglyphs -located near each other on vertical or horizontal if after such transposition -a combination of three or more identical pictures abreast is generated. Such -lines are disappeared immediately, and free place is filled by hieroglyphs -which "falled" from top. Missing hieroglyphs are generated randomly. For -disappearing hieroglyphs points are added. For combination of hieroglyphs -number of points is calculated by formula L+(L+1)^(N-3), but no more than -20*L*N, where N is number of hieroglyphs in combination, and L is level number. -To pass to the next level it is required to remove certain number of -hieroglyphs (different on each level). From below of panel with hieroglyphs is -located field which indicates how many is passed and how many is remained. - -1st level - 500 -2nd level - 450 -3rd level - 400 -4th level - 350 -5th level - 300 -6th level and further - 50*(L+1) - -On the first level combinations are composed from 6 states of hieroglyphs. -With each new level one new hieroglyph is involved, but no more than 10 -(i.e. starting from 5th level and further 10 different hieroglyphs are -involved, not counting special ones). - -Starting from 2nd level for each combination from 4 and more hieroglyphs, -and also for passing each fourth of level the player gets "free" hieroglyph - -it is usual hieroglyph (generated randomly), which keeps "in pocket" of player -and can be necessarily inserted by player to any place and replace thus -located there hieroglyph. - -Starting from 3rd level for each combination from 5 and more hieroglyphs, -and also for passing each third of level the player gets "universal key", -which matches to any combination of hieroglyphs and to several different -combination simultaneously. - -Starting from 4th level for each combination from 6 and more hieroglyphs, -and also for passing a half of level the player gets "space crooker", -which allows, when is used, to make 3 moves (not obligatory successive) at -diagonal. - -The player can not have simultaneously more than 1 extra hieroglyph of each -type (1 usual, 1 joker and 1 crooker). - -The game is ended, if the player can not make any combination with existing -hieroglyphs. diff --git a/data/new-stack/docs/FASM.TXT b/data/new-stack/docs/FASM.TXT deleted file mode 100644 index e5665e667c..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/docs/FASM.TXT +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4723 +0,0 @@ - - ,''' - ,,;,, ,,,, ,,,,, ,,, ,, - ; ; ; ; ; ; - ; ,''''; '''', ; ; ; - ; ',,,,;, ,,,,,' ; ; ; - - flat assembler 1.70 - Programmer's Manual - - -Table of contents ------------------ - -Chapter 1 Introduction - - 1.1 Compiler overview - 1.1.1 System requirements - 1.1.2 Executing compiler from command line - 1.1.3 Compiler messages - 1.1.4 Output formats - - 1.2 Assembly syntax - 1.2.1 Instruction syntax - 1.2.2 Data definitions - 1.2.3 Constants and labels - 1.2.4 Numerical expressions - 1.2.5 Jumps and calls - 1.2.6 Size settings - -Chapter 2 Instruction set - - 2.1 The x86 architecture instructions - 2.1.1 Data movement instructions - 2.1.2 Type conversion instructions - 2.1.3 Binary arithmetic instructions - 2.1.4 Decimal arithmetic instructions - 2.1.5 Logical instructions - 2.1.6 Control transfer instructions - 2.1.7 I/O instructions - 2.1.8 Strings operations - 2.1.9 Flag control instructions - 2.1.10 Conditional operations - 2.1.11 Miscellaneous instructions - 2.1.12 System instructions - 2.1.13 FPU instructions - 2.1.14 MMX instructions - 2.1.15 SSE instructions - 2.1.16 SSE2 instructions - 2.1.17 SSE3 instructions - 2.1.18 AMD 3DNow! instructions - 2.1.19 The x86-64 long mode instructions - 2.1.20 SSE4 instructions - 2.1.21 AVX instructions - 2.1.22 AVX2 instructions - 2.1.23 Auxiliary sets of computational instructions - 2.1.24 Other extensions of instruction set - - 2.2 Control directives - 2.2.1 Numerical constants - 2.2.2 Conditional assembly - 2.2.3 Repeating blocks of instructions - 2.2.4 Addressing spaces - 2.2.5 Other directives - 2.2.6 Multiple passes - - 2.3 Preprocessor directives - 2.3.1 Including source files - 2.3.2 Symbolic constants - 2.3.3 Macroinstructions - 2.3.4 Structures - 2.3.5 Repeating macroinstructions - 2.3.6 Conditional preprocessing - 2.3.7 Order of processing - - 2.4 Formatter directives - 2.4.1 MZ executable - 2.4.2 Portable Executable - 2.4.3 Common Object File Format - 2.4.4 Executable and Linkable Format - - - -Chapter 1 Introduction ------------------------ - -This chapter contains all the most important information you need to begin -using the flat assembler. If you are experienced assembly language programmer, -you should read at least this chapter before using this compiler. - - -1.1 Compiler overview - -Flat assembler is a fast assembly language compiler for the x86 architecture -processors, which does multiple passes to optimize the size of generated -machine code. It is self-compilable and versions for different operating -systems are provided. All the versions are designed to be used from the system -command line and they should not differ in behavior. - - -1.1.1 System requirements - -All versions require the x86 architecture 32-bit processor (at least 80386), -although they can produce programs for the x86 architecture 16-bit processors, -too. DOS version requires an OS compatible with MS DOS 2.0 and either true -real mode environment or DPMI. Windows version requires a Win32 console -compatible with 3.1 version. - - -1.1.2 Executing compiler from command line - -To execute flat assembler from the command line you need to provide two -parameters - first should be name of source file, second should be name of -destination file. If no second parameter is given, the name for output -file will be guessed automatically. After displaying short information about -the program name and version, compiler will read the data from source file and -compile it. When the compilation is successful, compiler will write the -generated code to the destination file and display the summary of compilation -process; otherwise it will display the information about error that occurred. - The source file should be a text file, and can be created in any text -editor. Line breaks are accepted in both DOS and Unix standards, tabulators -are treated as spaces. - In the command line you can also include "-m" option followed by a number, -which specifies how many kilobytes of memory flat assembler should maximally -use. In case of DOS version this options limits only the usage of extended -memory. The "-p" option followed by a number can be used to specify the limit -for number of passes the assembler performs. If code cannot be generated -within specified amount of passes, the assembly will be terminated with an -error message. The maximum value of this setting is 65536, while the default -limit, used when no such option is included in command line, is 100. -It is also possible to limit the number of passes the assembler -performs, with the "-p" option followed by a number specifying the maximum -number of passes. - There are no command line options that would affect the output of compiler, -flat assembler requires only the source code to include the information it -really needs. For example, to specify output format you specify it by using -the "format" directive at the beginning of source. - - -1.1.3 Compiler messages - -As it is stated above, after the successful compilation, the compiler displays -the compilation summary. It includes the information of how many passes was -done, how much time it took, and how many bytes were written into the -destination file. -The following is an example of the compilation summary: - -flat assembler version 1.70 (16384 kilobytes memory) -38 passes, 5.3 seconds, 77824 bytes. - -In case of error during the compilation process, the program will display an -error message. For example, when compiler can't find the input file, it will -display the following message: - -flat assembler version 1.70 (16384 kilobytes memory) -error: source file not found. - -If the error is connected with a specific part of source code, the source line -that caused the error will be also displayed. Also placement of this line in -the source is given to help you finding this error, for example: - -flat assembler version 1.70 (16384 kilobytes memory) -example.asm [3]: - mob ax,1 -error: illegal instruction. - -It means that in the third line of the "example.asm" file compiler has -encountered an unrecognized instruction. When the line that caused error -contains a macroinstruction, also the line in macroinstruction definition -that generated the erroneous instruction is displayed: - -flat assembler version 1.70 (16384 kilobytes memory) -example.asm [6]: - stoschar 7 -example.asm [3] stoschar [1]: - mob al,char -error: illegal instruction. - -It means that the macroinstruction in the sixth line of the "example.asm" file -generated an unrecognized instruction with the first line of its definition. - - -1.1.4 Output formats - -By default, when there is no "format" directive in source file, flat -assembler simply puts generated instruction codes into output, creating this -way flat binary file. By default it generates 16-bit code, but you can always -turn it into the 16-bit or 32-bit mode by using "use16" or "use32" directive. -Some of the output formats switch into 32-bit mode, when selected - more -information about formats which you can choose can be found in 2.4. - All output code is always in the order in which it was entered into the -source file. - - -1.2 Assembly syntax - -The information provided below is intended mainly for the assembler -programmers that have been using some other assembly compilers before. -If you are beginner, you should look for the assembly programming tutorials. - Flat assembler by default uses the Intel syntax for the assembly -instructions, although you can customize it using the preprocessor -capabilities (macroinstructions and symbolic constants). It also has its own -set of the directives - the instructions for compiler. - All symbols defined inside the sources are case-sensitive. - - -1.2.1 Instruction syntax - -Instructions in assembly language are separated by line breaks, and one -instruction is expected to fill the one line of text. If a line contains -a semicolon, except for the semicolons inside the quoted strings, the rest of -this line is the comment and compiler ignores it. If a line ends with "\" -character (eventually the semicolon and comment may follow it), the next line -is attached at this point. - Each line in source is the sequence of items, which may be one of the three -types. One type are the symbol characters, which are the special characters -that are individual items even when are not spaced from the other ones. -Any of the "+-*/=<>()[]{}:,|&~#`" is the symbol character. The sequence of -other characters, separated from other items with either blank spaces or -symbol characters, is a symbol. If the first character of symbol is either a -single or double quote, it integrates any sequence of characters following it, -even the special ones, into a quoted string, which should end with the same -character, with which it began (the single or double quote) - however if there -are two such characters in a row (without any other character between them), -they are integrated into quoted string as just one of them and the quoted -string continues then. The symbols other than symbol characters and quoted -strings can be used as names, so are also called the name symbols. - Every instruction consists of the mnemonic and the various number of -operands, separated with commas. The operand can be register, immediate value -or a data addressed in memory, it can also be preceded by size operator to -define or override its size (table 1.1). Names of available registers you can -find in table 1.2, their sizes cannot be overridden. Immediate value can be -specified by any numerical expression. - When operand is a data in memory, the address of that data (also any -numerical expression, but it may contain registers) should be enclosed in -square brackets or preceded by "ptr" operator. For example instruction -"mov eax,3" will put the immediate value 3 into the EAX register, instruction -"mov eax,[7]" will put the 32-bit value from the address 7 into EAX and the -instruction "mov byte [7],3" will put the immediate value 3 into the byte at -address 7, it can also be written as "mov byte ptr 7,3". To specify which -segment register should be used for addressing, segment register name followed -by a colon should be put just before the address value (inside the square -brackets or after the "ptr" operator). - - Table 1.1 Size operators - /-------------------------\ - | Operator | Bits | Bytes | - |==========|======|=======| - | byte | 8 | 1 | - | word | 16 | 2 | - | dword | 32 | 4 | - | fword | 48 | 6 | - | pword | 48 | 6 | - | qword | 64 | 8 | - | tbyte | 80 | 10 | - | tword | 80 | 10 | - | dqword | 128 | 16 | - | xword | 128 | 16 | - | qqword | 256 | 32 | - | yword | 256 | 32 | - \-------------------------/ - - Table 1.2 Registers - /-----------------------------------------------------------------\ - | Type | Bits | | - |=========|======|================================================| - | | 8 | al cl dl bl ah ch dh bh | - | General | 16 | ax cx dx bx sp bp si di | - | | 32 | eax ecx edx ebx esp ebp esi edi | - |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| - | Segment | 16 | es cs ss ds fs gs | - |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| - | Control | 32 | cr0 cr2 cr3 cr4 | - |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| - | Debug | 32 | dr0 dr1 dr2 dr3 dr6 dr7 | - |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| - | FPU | 80 | st0 st1 st2 st3 st4 st5 st6 st7 | - |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| - | MMX | 64 | mm0 mm1 mm2 mm3 mm4 mm5 mm6 mm7 | - |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| - | SSE | 128 | xmm0 xmm1 xmm2 xmm3 xmm4 xmm5 xmm6 xmm7 | - |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| - | AVX | 256 | ymm0 ymm1 ymm2 ymm3 ymm4 ymm5 ymm6 ymm7 | - \-----------------------------------------------------------------/ - - -1.2.2 Data definitions - -To define data or reserve a space for it, use one of the directives listed in -table 1.3. The data definition directive should be followed by one or more of -numerical expressions, separated with commas. These expressions define the -values for data cells of size depending on which directive is used. For -example "db 1,2,3" will define the three bytes of values 1, 2 and 3 -respectively. - The "db" and "du" directives also accept the quoted string values of any -length, which will be converted into chain of bytes when "db" is used and into -chain of words with zeroed high byte when "du" is used. For example "db 'abc'" -will define the three bytes of values 61, 62 and 63. - The "dp" directive and its synonym "df" accept the values consisting of two -numerical expressions separated with colon, the first value will become the -high word and the second value will become the low double word of the far -pointer value. Also "dd" accepts such pointers consisting of two word values -separated with colon, and "dt" accepts the word and quad word value separated -with colon, the quad word is stored first. The "dt" directive with single -expression as parameter accepts only floating point values and creates data in -FPU double extended precision format. - Any of the above directive allows the usage of special "dup" operator to -make multiple copies of given values. The count of duplicates should precede -this operator and the value to duplicate should follow - it can even be the -chain of values separated with commas, but such set of values needs to be -enclosed with parenthesis, like "db 5 dup (1,2)", which defines five copies -of the given two byte sequence. - The "file" is a special directive and its syntax is different. This -directive includes a chain of bytes from file and it should be followed by the -quoted file name, then optionally numerical expression specifying offset in -file preceded by the colon, and - also optionally - comma and numerical -expression specifying count of bytes to include (if no count is specified, all -data up to the end of file is included). For example "file 'data.bin'" will -include the whole file as binary data and "file 'data.bin':10h,4" will include -only four bytes starting at offset 10h. - The data reservation directive should be followed by only one numerical -expression, and this value defines how many cells of the specified size should -be reserved. All data definition directives also accept the "?" value, which -means that this cell should not be initialized to any value and the effect is -the same as by using the data reservation directive. The uninitialized data -may not be included in the output file, so its values should be always -considered unknown. - - Table 1.3 Data directives - /----------------------------\ - | Size | Define | Reserve | - | (bytes) | data | data | - |=========|========|=========| - | 1 | db | rb | - | | file | | - |---------|--------|---------| - | 2 | dw | rw | - | | du | | - |---------|--------|---------| - | 4 | dd | rd | - |---------|--------|---------| - | 6 | dp | rp | - | | df | rf | - |---------|--------|---------| - | 8 | dq | rq | - |---------|--------|---------| - | 10 | dt | rt | - \----------------------------/ - - -1.2.3 Constants and labels - -In the numerical expressions you can also use constants or labels instead of -numbers. To define the constant or label you should use the specific -directives. Each label can be defined only once and it is accessible from the -any place of source (even before it was defined). Constant can be redefined -many times, but in this case it is accessible only after it was defined, and -is always equal to the value from last definition before the place where it's -used. When a constant is defined only once in source, it is - like the label - -accessible from anywhere. - The definition of constant consists of name of the constant followed by the -"=" character and numerical expression, which after calculation will become -the value of constant. This value is always calculated at the time the -constant is defined. For example you can define "count" constant by using the -directive "count = 17", and then use it in the assembly instructions, like -"mov cx,count" - which will become "mov cx,17" during the compilation process. - There are different ways to define labels. The simplest is to follow the -name of label by the colon, this directive can even be followed by the other -instruction in the same line. It defines the label whose value is equal to -offset of the point where it's defined. This method is usually used to label -the places in code. The other way is to follow the name of label (without a -colon) by some data directive. It defines the label with value equal to -offset of the beginning of defined data, and remembered as a label for data -with cell size as specified for that data directive in table 1.3. - The label can be treated as constant of value equal to offset of labeled -code or data. For example when you define data using the labeled directive -"char db 224", to put the offset of this data into BX register you should use -"mov bx,char" instruction, and to put the value of byte addressed by "char" -label to DL register, you should use "mov dl,[char]" (or "mov dl,ptr char"). -But when you try to assemble "mov ax,[char]", it will cause an error, because -fasm compares the sizes of operands, which should be equal. You can force -assembling that instruction by using size override: "mov ax,word [char]", but -remember that this instruction will read the two bytes beginning at "char" -address, while it was defined as a one byte. - The last and the most flexible way to define labels is to use "label" -directive. This directive should be followed by the name of label, then -optionally size operator (it can be preceded by a colon) and then - also -optionally "at" operator and the numerical expression defining the address at -which this label should be defined. For example "label wchar word at char" -will define a new label for the 16-bit data at the address of "char". Now the -instruction "mov ax,[wchar]" will be after compilation the same as -"mov ax,word [char]". If no address is specified, "label" directive defines -the label at current offset. Thus "mov [wchar],57568" will copy two bytes -while "mov [char],224" will copy one byte to the same address. - The label whose name begins with dot is treated as local label, and its name -is attached to the name of last global label (with name beginning with -anything but dot) to make the full name of this label. So you can use the -short name (beginning with dot) of this label anywhere before the next global -label is defined, and in the other places you have to use the full name. Label -beginning with two dots are the exception - they are like global, but they -don't become the new prefix for local labels. - The "@@" name means anonymous label, you can have defined many of them in -the source. Symbol "@b" (or equivalent "@r") references the nearest preceding -anonymous label, symbol "@f" references the nearest following anonymous label. -These special symbol are case-insensitive. - - -1.2.4 Numerical expressions - -In the above examples all the numerical expressions were the simple numbers, -constants or labels. But they can be more complex, by using the arithmetical -or logical operators for calculations at compile time. All these operators -with their priority values are listed in table 1.4. The operations with higher -priority value will be calculated first, you can of course change this -behavior by putting some parts of expression into parenthesis. The "+", "-", -"*" and "/" are standard arithmetical operations, "mod" calculates the -remainder from division. The "and", "or", "xor", "shl", "shr" and "not" -perform the same logical operations as assembly instructions of those names. -The "rva" and "plt" are special unary operators that perform conversions -between different kinds of addresses, they can be used only with few of the -output formats and their meaning may vary (see 2.4). - The arithmetical and logical calculations are usually processed as if they -operated on infinite precision 2-adic numbers, and assembler signalizes an -overflow error if because of its limitations it is not table to perform the -required calculation, or if the result is too large number to fit in either -signed or unsigned range for the destination unit size. However "not", "xor" -and "shr" operators are exceptions from this rule - if the value specified -by numerical expression has to fit in a unit of specified size, and the -arguments for operation fit into that size, the operation will be performed -with precision limited to that size. - The numbers in the expression are by default treated as a decimal, binary -numbers should have the "b" letter attached at the end, octal number should -end with "o" letter, hexadecimal numbers should begin with "0x" characters -(like in C language) or with the "$" character (like in Pascal language) or -they should end with "h" letter. Also quoted string, when encountered in -expression, will be converted into number - the first character will become -the least significant byte of number. - The numerical expression used as an address value can also contain any of -general registers used for addressing, they can be added and multiplied by -appropriate values, as it is allowed for the x86 architecture instructions. - There are also some special symbols that can be used inside the numerical -expression. First is "$", which is always equal to the value of current -offset, while "$$" is equal to base address of current addressing space. The -other one is "%", which is the number of current repeat in parts of code that -are repeated using some special directives (see 2.2). There's also "%t" -symbol, which is always equal to the current time stamp. - Any numerical expression can also consist of single floating point value -(flat assembler does not allow any floating point operations at compilation -time) in the scientific notation, they can end with the "f" letter to be -recognized, otherwise they should contain at least one of the "." or "E" -characters. So "1.0", "1E0" and "1f" define the same floating point value, -while simple "1" defines an integer value. - - Table 1.4 Arithmetical and logical operators by priority - /-------------------------\ - | Priority | Operators | - |==========|==============| - | 0 | + - | - |----------|--------------| - | 1 | * / | - |----------|--------------| - | 2 | mod | - |----------|--------------| - | 3 | and or xor | - |----------|--------------| - | 4 | shl shr | - |----------|--------------| - | 5 | not | - |----------|--------------| - | 6 | rva plt | - \-------------------------/ - - -1.2.5 Jumps and calls - -The operand of any jump or call instruction can be preceded not only by the -size operator, but also by one of the operators specifying type of the jump: -"short", "near" of "far". For example, when assembler is in 16-bit mode, -instruction "jmp dword [0]" will become the far jump and when assembler is -in 32-bit mode, it will become the near jump. To force this instruction to be -treated differently, use the "jmp near dword [0]" or "jmp far dword [0]" form. - When operand of near jump is the immediate value, assembler will generate -the shortest variant of this jump instruction if possible (but will not create -32-bit instruction in 16-bit mode nor 16-bit instruction in 32-bit mode, -unless there is a size operator stating it). By specifying the jump type -you can force it to always generate long variant (for example "jmp near 0") -or to always generate short variant and terminate with an error when it's -impossible (for example "jmp short 0"). - - -1.2.6 Size settings - -When instruction uses some memory addressing, by default the smallest form of -instruction is generated by using the short displacement if only address -value fits in the range. This can be overridden using the "word" or "dword" -operator before the address inside the square brackets (or after the "ptr" -operator), which forces the long displacement of appropriate size to be made. -In case when address is not relative to any registers, those operators allow -also to choose the appropriate mode of absolute addressing. - Instructions "adc", "add", "and", "cmp", "or", "sbb", "sub" and "xor" with -first operand being 16-bit or 32-bit are by default generated in shortened -8-bit form when the second operand is immediate value fitting in the range -for signed 8-bit values. It also can be overridden by putting the "word" or -"dword" operator before the immediate value. The similar rules applies to the -"imul" instruction with the last operand being immediate value. - Immediate value as an operand for "push" instruction without a size operator -is by default treated as a word value if assembler is in 16-bit mode and as a -double word value if assembler is in 32-bit mode, shorter 8-bit form of this -instruction is used if possible, "word" or "dword" size operator forces the -"push" instruction to be generated in longer form for specified size. "pushw" -and "pushd" mnemonics force assembler to generate 16-bit or 32-bit code -without forcing it to use the longer form of instruction. - - -Chapter 2 Instruction set --------------------------- - -This chapter provides the detailed information about the instructions and -directives supported by flat assembler. Directives for defining labels were -already discussed in 1.2.3, all other directives will be described later in -this chapter. - - -2.1 The x86 architecture instructions - -In this section you can find both the information about the syntax and -purpose the assembly language instructions. If you need more technical -information, look for the Intel Architecture Software Developer's Manual. - Assembly instructions consist of the mnemonic (instruction's name) and from -zero to three operands. If there are two or more operands, usually first is -the destination operand and second is the source operand. Each operand can be -register, memory or immediate value (see 1.2 for details about syntax of -operands). After the description of each instruction there are examples -of different combinations of operands, if the instruction has any. - Some instructions act as prefixes and can be followed by other instruction -in the same line, and there can be more than one prefix in a line. Each name -of the segment register is also a mnemonic of instruction prefix, altough it -is recommended to use segment overrides inside the square brackets instead of -these prefixes. - - -2.1.1 Data movement instructions - -"mov" transfers a byte, word or double word from the source operand to the -destination operand. It can transfer data between general registers, from -the general register to memory, or from memory to general register, but it -cannot move from memory to memory. It can also transfer an immediate value to -general register or memory, segment register to general register or memory, -general register or memory to segment register, control or debug register to -general register and general register to control or debug register. The "mov" -can be assembled only if the size of source operand and size of destination -operand are the same. Below are the examples for each of the allowed -combinations: - - mov bx,ax ; general register to general register - mov [char],al ; general register to memory - mov bl,[char] ; memory to general register - mov dl,32 ; immediate value to general register - mov [char],32 ; immediate value to memory - mov ax,ds ; segment register to general register - mov [bx],ds ; segment register to memory - mov ds,ax ; general register to segment register - mov ds,[bx] ; memory to segment register - mov eax,cr0 ; control register to general register - mov cr3,ebx ; general register to control register - - "xchg" swaps the contents of two operands. It can swap two byte operands, -two word operands or two double word operands. Order of operands is not -important. The operands may be two general registers, or general register -with memory. For example: - - xchg ax,bx ; swap two general registers - xchg al,[char] ; swap register with memory - - "push" decrements the stack frame pointer (ESP register), then transfers -the operand to the top of stack indicated by ESP. The operand can be memory, -general register, segment register or immediate value of word or double word -size. If operand is an immediate value and no size is specified, it is by -default treated as a word value if assembler is in 16-bit mode and as a double -word value if assembler is in 32-bit mode. "pushw" and "pushd" mnemonics are -variants of this instruction that store the values of word or double word size -respectively. If more operands follow in the same line (separated only with -spaces, not commas), compiler will assemble chain of the "push" instructions -with these operands. The examples are with single operands: - - push ax ; store general register - push es ; store segment register - pushw [bx] ; store memory - push 1000h ; store immediate value - - "pusha" saves the contents of the eight general register on the stack. -This instruction has no operands. There are two version of this instruction, -one 16-bit and one 32-bit, assembler automatically generates the appropriate -version for current mode, but it can be overridden by using "pushaw" or -"pushad" mnemonic to always get the 16-bit or 32-bit version. The 16-bit -version of this instruction pushes general registers on the stack in the -following order: AX, CX, DX, BX, the initial value of SP before AX was pushed, -BP, SI and DI. The 32-bit version pushes equivalent 32-bit general registers -in the same order. - "pop" transfers the word or double word at the current top of stack to the -destination operand, and then increments ESP to point to the new top of stack. -The operand can be memory, general register or segment register. "popw" and -"popd" mnemonics are variants of this instruction for restoring the values of -word or double word size respectively. If more operands separated with spaces -follow in the same line, compiler will assemble chain of the "pop" -instructions with these operands. - - pop bx ; restore general register - pop ds ; restore segment register - popw [si] ; restore memory - - "popa" restores the registers saved on the stack by "pusha" instruction, -except for the saved value of SP (or ESP), which is ignored. This instruction -has no operands. To force assembling 16-bit or 32-bit version of this -instruction use "popaw" or "popad" mnemonic. - - -2.1.2 Type conversion instructions - -The type conversion instructions convert bytes into words, words into double -words, and double words into quad words. These conversions can be done using -the sign extension or zero extension. The sign extension fills the extra bits -of the larger item with the value of the sign bit of the smaller item, the -zero extension simply fills them with zeros. - "cwd" and "cdq" double the size of value AX or EAX register respectively -and store the extra bits into the DX or EDX register. The conversion is done -using the sign extension. These instructions have no operands. - "cbw" extends the sign of the byte in AL throughout AX, and "cwde" extends -the sign of the word in AX throughout EAX. These instructions also have no -operands. - "movsx" converts a byte to word or double word and a word to double word -using the sign extension. "movzx" does the same, but it uses the zero -extension. The source operand can be general register or memory, while the -destination operand must be a general register. For example: - - movsx ax,al ; byte register to word register - movsx edx,dl ; byte register to double word register - movsx eax,ax ; word register to double word register - movsx ax,byte [bx] ; byte memory to word register - movsx edx,byte [bx] ; byte memory to double word register - movsx eax,word [bx] ; word memory to double word register - - -2.1.3 Binary arithmetic instructions - -"add" replaces the destination operand with the sum of the source and -destination operands and sets CF if overflow has occurred. The operands may -be bytes, words or double words. The destination operand can be general -register or memory, the source operand can be general register or immediate -value, it can also be memory if the destination operand is register. - - add ax,bx ; add register to register - add ax,[si] ; add memory to register - add [di],al ; add register to memory - add al,48 ; add immediate value to register - add [char],48 ; add immediate value to memory - - "adc" sums the operands, adds one if CF is set, and replaces the destination -operand with the result. Rules for the operands are the same as for the "add" -instruction. An "add" followed by multiple "adc" instructions can be used to -add numbers longer than 32 bits. - "inc" adds one to the operand, it does not affect CF. The operand can be a -general register or memory, and the size of the operand can be byte, word or -double word. - - inc ax ; increment register by one - inc byte [bx] ; increment memory by one - - "sub" subtracts the source operand from the destination operand and replaces -the destination operand with the result. If a borrow is required, the CF is -set. Rules for the operands are the same as for the "add" instruction. - "sbb" subtracts the source operand from the destination operand, subtracts -one if CF is set, and stores the result to the destination operand. Rules for -the operands are the same as for the "add" instruction. A "sub" followed by -multiple "sbb" instructions may be used to subtract numbers longer than 32 -bits. - "dec" subtracts one from the operand, it does not affect CF. Rules for the -operand are the same as for the "inc" instruction. - "cmp" subtracts the source operand from the destination operand. It updates -the flags as the "sub" instruction, but does not alter the source and -destination operands. Rules for the operands are the same as for the "sub" -instruction. - "neg" subtracts a signed integer operand from zero. The effect of this -instructon is to reverse the sign of the operand from positive to negative or -from negative to positive. Rules for the operand are the same as for the "inc" -instruction. - "xadd" exchanges the destination operand with the source operand, then loads -the sum of the two values into the destination operand. Rules for the operands -are the same as for the "add" instruction. - All the above binary arithmetic instructions update SF, ZF, PF and OF flags. -SF is always set to the same value as the result's sign bit, ZF is set when -all the bits of result are zero, PF is set when low order eight bits of result -contain an even number of set bits, OF is set if result is too large for a -positive number or too small for a negative number (excluding sign bit) to fit -in destination operand. - "mul" performs an unsigned multiplication of the operand and the -accumulator. If the operand is a byte, the processor multiplies it by the -contents of AL and returns the 16-bit result to AH and AL. If the operand is a -word, the processor multiplies it by the contents of AX and returns the 32-bit -result to DX and AX. If the operand is a double word, the processor multiplies -it by the contents of EAX and returns the 64-bit result in EDX and EAX. "mul" -sets CF and OF when the upper half of the result is nonzero, otherwise they -are cleared. Rules for the operand are the same as for the "inc" instruction. - "imul" performs a signed multiplication operation. This instruction has -three variations. First has one operand and behaves in the same way as the -"mul" instruction. Second has two operands, in this case destination operand -is multiplied by the source operand and the result replaces the destination -operand. Destination operand must be a general register, it can be word or -double word, source operand can be general register, memory or immediate -value. Third form has three operands, the destination operand must be a -general register, word or double word in size, source operand can be general -register or memory, and third operand must be an immediate value. The source -operand is multiplied by the immediate value and the result is stored in the -destination register. All the three forms calculate the product to twice the -size of operands and set CF and OF when the upper half of the result is -nonzero, but second and third form truncate the product to the size of -operands. So second and third forms can be also used for unsigned operands -because, whether the operands are signed or unsigned, the lower half of the -product is the same. Below are the examples for all three forms: - - imul bl ; accumulator by register - imul word [si] ; accumulator by memory - imul bx,cx ; register by register - imul bx,[si] ; register by memory - imul bx,10 ; register by immediate value - imul ax,bx,10 ; register by immediate value to register - imul ax,[si],10 ; memory by immediate value to register - - "div" performs an unsigned division of the accumulator by the operand. -The dividend (the accumulator) is twice the size of the divisor (the operand), -the quotient and remainder have the same size as the divisor. If divisor is -byte, the dividend is taken from AX register, the quotient is stored in AL and -the remainder is stored in AH. If divisor is word, the upper half of dividend -is taken from DX, the lower half of dividend is taken from AX, the quotient is -stored in AX and the remainder is stored in DX. If divisor is double word, -the upper half of dividend is taken from EDX, the lower half of dividend is -taken from EAX, the quotient is stored in EAX and the remainder is stored in -EDX. Rules for the operand are the same as for the "mul" instruction. - "idiv" performs a signed division of the accumulator by the operand. -It uses the same registers as the "div" instruction, and the rules for -the operand are the same. - - -2.1.4 Decimal arithmetic instructions - -Decimal arithmetic is performed by combining the binary arithmetic -instructions (already described in the prior section) with the decimal -arithmetic instructions. The decimal arithmetic instructions are used to -adjust the results of a previous binary arithmetic operation to produce a -valid packed or unpacked decimal result, or to adjust the inputs to a -subsequent binary arithmetic operation so the operation will produce a valid -packed or unpacked decimal result. - "daa" adjusts the result of adding two valid packed decimal operands in -AL. "daa" must always follow the addition of two pairs of packed decimal -numbers (one digit in each half-byte) to obtain a pair of valid packed -decimal digits as results. The carry flag is set if carry was needed. -This instruction has no operands. - "das" adjusts the result of subtracting two valid packed decimal operands -in AL. "das" must always follow the subtraction of one pair of packed decimal -numbers (one digit in each half-byte) from another to obtain a pair of valid -packed decimal digits as results. The carry flag is set if a borrow was -needed. This instruction has no operands. - "aaa" changes the contents of register AL to a valid unpacked decimal -number, and zeroes the top four bits. "aaa" must always follow the addition -of two unpacked decimal operands in AL. The carry flag is set and AH is -incremented if a carry is necessary. This instruction has no operands. - "aas" changes the contents of register AL to a valid unpacked decimal -number, and zeroes the top four bits. "aas" must always follow the -subtraction of one unpacked decimal operand from another in AL. The carry flag -is set and AH decremented if a borrow is necessary. This instruction has no -operands. - "aam" corrects the result of a multiplication of two valid unpacked decimal -numbers. "aam" must always follow the multiplication of two decimal numbers -to produce a valid decimal result. The high order digit is left in AH, the -low order digit in AL. The generalized version of this instruction allows -adjustment of the contents of the AX to create two unpacked digits of any -number base. The standard version of this instruction has no operands, the -generalized version has one operand - an immediate value specifying the -number base for the created digits. - "aad" modifies the numerator in AH and AL to prepare for the division of two -valid unpacked decimal operands so that the quotient produced by the division -will be a valid unpacked decimal number. AH should contain the high order -digit and AL the low order digit. This instruction adjusts the value and -places the result in AL, while AH will contain zero. The generalized version -of this instruction allows adjustment of two unpacked digits of any number -base. Rules for the operand are the same as for the "aam" instruction. - - -2.1.5 Logical instructions - -"not" inverts the bits in the specified operand to form a one's complement -of the operand. It has no effect on the flags. Rules for the operand are the -same as for the "inc" instruction. - "and", "or" and "xor" instructions perform the standard logical operations. -They update the SF, ZF and PF flags. Rules for the operands are the same as -for the "add" instruction. - "bt", "bts", "btr" and "btc" instructions operate on a single bit which can -be in memory or in a general register. The location of the bit is specified -as an offset from the low order end of the operand. The value of the offset -is the taken from the second operand, it either may be an immediate byte or -a general register. These instructions first assign the value of the selected -bit to CF. "bt" instruction does nothing more, "bts" sets the selected bit to -1, "btr" resets the selected bit to 0, "btc" changes the bit to its -complement. The first operand can be word or double word. - - bt ax,15 ; test bit in register - bts word [bx],15 ; test and set bit in memory - btr ax,cx ; test and reset bit in register - btc word [bx],cx ; test and complement bit in memory - - "bsf" and "bsr" instructions scan a word or double word for first set bit -and store the index of this bit into destination operand, which must be -general register. The bit string being scanned is specified by source operand, -it may be either general register or memory. The ZF flag is set if the entire -string is zero (no set bits are found); otherwise it is cleared. If no set bit -is found, the value of the destination register is undefined. "bsf" scans from -low order to high order (starting from bit index zero). "bsr" scans from high -order to low order (starting from bit index 15 of a word or index 31 of a -double word). - - bsf ax,bx ; scan register forward - bsr ax,[si] ; scan memory reverse - - "shl" shifts the destination operand left by the number of bits specified -in the second operand. The destination operand can be byte, word, or double -word general register or memory. The second operand can be an immediate value -or the CL register. The processor shifts zeros in from the right (low order) -side of the operand as bits exit from the left side. The last bit that exited -is stored in CF. "sal" is a synonym for "shl". - - shl al,1 ; shift register left by one bit - shl byte [bx],1 ; shift memory left by one bit - shl ax,cl ; shift register left by count from cl - shl word [bx],cl ; shift memory left by count from cl - - "shr" and "sar" shift the destination operand right by the number of bits -specified in the second operand. Rules for operands are the same as for the -"shl" instruction. "shr" shifts zeros in from the left side of the operand as -bits exit from the right side. The last bit that exited is stored in CF. -"sar" preserves the sign of the operand by shifting in zeros on the left side -if the value is positive or by shifting in ones if the value is negative. - "shld" shifts bits of the destination operand to the left by the number -of bits specified in third operand, while shifting high order bits from the -source operand into the destination operand on the right. The source operand -remains unmodified. The destination operand can be a word or double word -general register or memory, the source operand must be a general register, -third operand can be an immediate value or the CL register. - - shld ax,bx,1 ; shift register left by one bit - shld [di],bx,1 ; shift memory left by one bit - shld ax,bx,cl ; shift register left by count from cl - shld [di],bx,cl ; shift memory left by count from cl - - "shrd" shifts bits of the destination operand to the right, while shifting -low order bits from the source operand into the destination operand on the -left. The source operand remains unmodified. Rules for operands are the same -as for the "shld" instruction. - "rol" and "rcl" rotate the byte, word or double word destination operand -left by the number of bits specified in the second operand. For each rotation -specified, the high order bit that exits from the left of the operand returns -at the right to become the new low order bit. "rcl" additionally puts in CF -each high order bit that exits from the left side of the operand before it -returns to the operand as the low order bit on the next rotation cycle. Rules -for operands are the same as for the "shl" instruction. - "ror" and "rcr" rotate the byte, word or double word destination operand -right by the number of bits specified in the second operand. For each rotation -specified, the low order bit that exits from the right of the operand returns -at the left to become the new high order bit. "rcr" additionally puts in CF -each low order bit that exits from the right side of the operand before it -returns to the operand as the high order bit on the next rotation cycle. -Rules for operands are the same as for the "shl" instruction. - "test" performs the same action as the "and" instruction, but it does not -alter the destination operand, only updates flags. Rules for the operands are -the same as for the "and" instruction. - "bswap" reverses the byte order of a 32-bit general register: bits 0 through -7 are swapped with bits 24 through 31, and bits 8 through 15 are swapped with -bits 16 through 23. This instruction is provided for converting little-endian -values to big-endian format and vice versa. - - bswap edx ; swap bytes in register - - -2.1.6 Control transfer instructions - -"jmp" unconditionally transfers control to the target location. The -destination address can be specified directly within the instruction or -indirectly through a register or memory, the acceptable size of this address -depends on whether the jump is near or far (it can be specified by preceding -the operand with "near" or "far" operator) and whether the instruction is -16-bit or 32-bit. Operand for near jump should be "word" size for 16-bit -instruction or the "dword" size for 32-bit instruction. Operand for far jump -should be "dword" size for 16-bit instruction or "pword" size for 32-bit -instruction. A direct "jmp" instruction includes the destination address as -part of the instruction (and can be preceded by "short", "near" or "far" -operator), the operand specifying address should be the numerical expression -for near or short jump, or two numerical expressions separated with colon for -far jump, the first specifies selector of segment, the second is the offset -within segment. The "pword" operator can be used to force the 32-bit far call, -and "dword" to force the 16-bit far call. An indirect "jmp" instruction -obtains the destination address indirectly through a register or a pointer -variable, the operand should be general register or memory. See also 1.2.5 for -some more details. - - jmp 100h ; direct near jump - jmp 0FFFFh:0 ; direct far jump - jmp ax ; indirect near jump - jmp pword [ebx] ; indirect far jump - - "call" transfers control to the procedure, saving on the stack the address -of the instruction following the "call" for later use by a "ret" (return) -instruction. Rules for the operands are the same as for the "jmp" instruction, -but the "call" has no short variant of direct instruction and thus it not -optimized. - "ret", "retn" and "retf" instructions terminate the execution of a procedure -and transfers control back to the program that originally invoked the -procedure using the address that was stored on the stack by the "call" -instruction. "ret" is the equivalent for "retn", which returns from the -procedure that was executed using the near call, while "retf" returns from -the procedure that was executed using the far call. These instructions default -to the size of address appropriate for the current code setting, but the size -of address can be forced to 16-bit by using the "retw", "retnw" and "retfw" -mnemonics, and to 32-bit by using the "retd", "retnd" and "retfd" mnemonics. -All these instructions may optionally specify an immediate operand, by adding -this constant to the stack pointer, they effectively remove any arguments that -the calling program pushed on the stack before the execution of the "call" -instruction. - "iret" returns control to an interrupted procedure. It differs from "ret" in -that it also pops the flags from the stack into the flags register. The flags -are stored on the stack by the interrupt mechanism. It defaults to the size of -return address appropriate for the current code setting, but it can be forced -to use 16-bit or 32-bit address by using the "iretw" or "iretd" mnemonic. - The conditional transfer instructions are jumps that may or may not transfer -control, depending on the state of the CPU flags when the instruction -executes. The mnemonics for conditional jumps may be obtained by attaching -the condition mnemonic (see table 2.1) to the "j" mnemonic, -for example "jc" instruction will transfer the control when the CF flag is -set. The conditional jumps can be short or near, and direct only, and can be -optimized (see 1.2.5), the operand should be an immediate value specifying -target address. - - Table 2.1 Conditions - /-----------------------------------------------------------\ - | Mnemonic | Condition tested | Description | - |==========|=======================|========================| - | o | OF = 1 | overflow | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | no | OF = 0 | not overflow | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | c | | carry | - | b | CF = 1 | below | - | nae | | not above nor equal | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | nc | | not carry | - | ae | CF = 0 | above or equal | - | nb | | not below | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | e | ZF = 1 | equal | - | z | | zero | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | ne | ZF = 0 | not equal | - | nz | | not zero | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | be | CF or ZF = 1 | below or equal | - | na | | not above | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | a | CF or ZF = 0 | above | - | nbe | | not below nor equal | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | s | SF = 1 | sign | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | ns | SF = 0 | not sign | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | p | PF = 1 | parity | - | pe | | parity even | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | np | PF = 0 | not parity | - | po | | parity odd | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | l | SF xor OF = 1 | less | - | nge | | not greater nor equal | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | ge | SF xor OF = 0 | greater or equal | - | nl | | not less | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | le | (SF xor OF) or ZF = 1 | less or equal | - | ng | | not greater | - |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| - | g | (SF xor OF) or ZF = 0 | greater | - | nle | | not less nor equal | - \-----------------------------------------------------------/ - - The "loop" instructions are conditional jumps that use a value placed in -CX (or ECX) to specify the number of repetitions of a software loop. All -"loop" instructions automatically decrement CX (or ECX) and terminate the -loop (don't transfer the control) when CX (or ECX) is zero. It uses CX or ECX -whether the current code setting is 16-bit or 32-bit, but it can be forced to -us CX with the "loopw" mnemonic or to use ECX with the "loopd" mnemonic. -"loope" and "loopz" are the synonyms for the same instruction, which acts as -the standard "loop", but also terminates the loop when ZF flag is set. -"loopew" and "loopzw" mnemonics force them to use CX register while "looped" -and "loopzd" force them to use ECX register. "loopne" and "loopnz" are the -synonyms for the same instructions, which acts as the standard "loop", but -also terminate the loop when ZF flag is not set. "loopnew" and "loopnzw" -mnemonics force them to use CX register while "loopned" and "loopnzd" force -them to use ECX register. Every "loop" instruction needs an operand being an -immediate value specifying target address, it can be only short jump (in the -range of 128 bytes back and 127 bytes forward from the address of instruction -following the "loop" instruction). - "jcxz" branches to the label specified in the instruction if it finds a -value of zero in CX, "jecxz" does the same, but checks the value of ECX -instead of CX. Rules for the operands are the same as for the "loop" -instruction. - "int" activates the interrupt service routine that corresponds to the -number specified as an operand to the instruction, the number should be in -range from 0 to 255. The interrupt service routine terminates with an "iret" -instruction that returns control to the instruction that follows "int". -"int3" mnemonic codes the short (one byte) trap that invokes the interrupt 3. -"into" instruction invokes the interrupt 4 if the OF flag is set. - "bound" verifies that the signed value contained in the specified register -lies within specified limits. An interrupt 5 occurs if the value contained in -the register is less than the lower bound or greater than the upper bound. It -needs two operands, the first operand specifies the register being tested, -the second operand should be memory address for the two signed limit values. -The operands can be "word" or "dword" in size. - - bound ax,[bx] ; check word for bounds - bound eax,[esi] ; check double word for bounds - - -2.1.7 I/O instructions - - "in" transfers a byte, word, or double word from an input port to AL, AX, -or EAX. I/O ports can be addressed either directly, with the immediate byte -value coded in instruction, or indirectly via the DX register. The destination -operand should be AL, AX, or EAX register. The source operand should be an -immediate value in range from 0 to 255, or DX register. - - in al,20h ; input byte from port 20h - in ax,dx ; input word from port addressed by dx - - "out" transfers a byte, word, or double word to an output port from AL, AX, -or EAX. The program can specify the number of the port using the same methods -as the "in" instruction. The destination operand should be an immediate value -in range from 0 to 255, or DX register. The source operand should be AL, AX, -or EAX register. - - out 20h,ax ; output word to port 20h - out dx,al ; output byte to port addressed by dx - - -2.1.8 Strings operations - -The string operations operate on one element of a string. A string element -may be a byte, a word, or a double word. The string elements are addressed by -SI and DI (or ESI and EDI) registers. After every string operation SI and/or -DI (or ESI and/or EDI) are automatically updated to point to the next element -of the string. If DF (direction flag) is zero, the index registers are -incremented, if DF is one, they are decremented. The amount of the increment -or decrement is 1, 2, or 4 depending on the size of the string element. Every -string operation instruction has short forms which have no operands and use -SI and/or DI when the code type is 16-bit, and ESI and/or EDI when the code -type is 32-bit. SI and ESI by default address data in the segment selected -by DS, DI and EDI always address data in the segment selected by ES. Short -form is obtained by attaching to the mnemonic of string operation letter -specifying the size of string element, it should be "b" for byte element, -"w" for word element, and "d" for double word element. Full form of string -operation needs operands providing the size operator and the memory addresses, -which can be SI or ESI with any segment prefix, DI or EDI always with ES -segment prefix. - "movs" transfers the string element pointed to by SI (or ESI) to the -location pointed to by DI (or EDI). Size of operands can be byte, word, or -double word. The destination operand should be memory addressed by DI or EDI, -the source operand should be memory addressed by SI or ESI with any segment -prefix. - - movs byte [di],[si] ; transfer byte - movs word [es:di],[ss:si] ; transfer word - movsd ; transfer double word - - "cmps" subtracts the destination string element from the source string -element and updates the flags AF, SF, PF, CF and OF, but it does not change -any of the compared elements. If the string elements are equal, ZF is set, -otherwise it is cleared. The first operand for this instruction should be the -source string element addressed by SI or ESI with any segment prefix, the -second operand should be the destination string element addressed by DI or -EDI. - - cmpsb ; compare bytes - cmps word [ds:si],[es:di] ; compare words - cmps dword [fs:esi],[edi] ; compare double words - - "scas" subtracts the destination string element from AL, AX, or EAX -(depending on the size of string element) and updates the flags AF, SF, ZF, -PF, CF and OF. If the values are equal, ZF is set, otherwise it is cleared. -The operand should be the destination string element addressed by DI or EDI. - - scas byte [es:di] ; scan byte - scasw ; scan word - scas dword [es:edi] ; scan double word - - "stos" places the value of AL, AX, or EAX into the destination string -element. Rules for the operand are the same as for the "scas" instruction. - "lods" places the source string element into AL, AX, or EAX. The operand -should be the source string element addressed by SI or ESI with any segment -prefix. - - lods byte [ds:si] ; load byte - lods word [cs:si] ; load word - lodsd ; load double word - - "ins" transfers a byte, word, or double word from an input port addressed -by DX register to the destination string element. The destination operand -should be memory addressed by DI or EDI, the source operand should be the DX -register. - - insb ; input byte - ins word [es:di],dx ; input word - ins dword [edi],dx ; input double word - - "outs" transfers the source string element to an output port addressed by -DX register. The destination operand should be the DX register and the source -operand should be memory addressed by SI or ESI with any segment prefix. - - outs dx,byte [si] ; output byte - outsw ; output word - outs dx,dword [gs:esi] ; output double word - - The repeat prefixes "rep", "repe"/"repz", and "repne"/"repnz" specify -repeated string operation. When a string operation instruction has a repeat -prefix, the operation is executed repeatedly, each time using a different -element of the string. The repetition terminates when one of the conditions -specified by the prefix is satisfied. All three prefixes automatically -decrease CX or ECX register (depending whether string operation instruction -uses the 16-bit or 32-bit addressing) after each operation and repeat the -associated operation until CX or ECX is zero. "repe"/"repz" and -"repne"/"repnz" are used exclusively with the "scas" and "cmps" instructions -(described below). When these prefixes are used, repetition of the next -instruction depends on the zero flag (ZF) also, "repe" and "repz" terminate -the execution when the ZF is zero, "repne" and "repnz" terminate the execution -when the ZF is set. - - rep movsd ; transfer multiple double words - repe cmpsb ; compare bytes until not equal - - -2.1.9 Flag control instructions - -The flag control instructions provide a method for directly changing the -state of bits in the flag register. All instructions described in this -section have no operands. - "stc" sets the CF (carry flag) to 1, "clc" zeroes the CF, "cmc" changes the -CF to its complement. "std" sets the DF (direction flag) to 1, "cld" zeroes -the DF, "sti" sets the IF (interrupt flag) to 1 and therefore enables the -interrupts, "cli" zeroes the IF and therefore disables the interrupts. - "lahf" copies SF, ZF, AF, PF, and CF to bits 7, 6, 4, 2, and 0 of the -AH register. The contents of the remaining bits are undefined. The flags -remain unaffected. - "sahf" transfers bits 7, 6, 4, 2, and 0 from the AH register into SF, ZF, -AF, PF, and CF. - "pushf" decrements "esp" by two or four and stores the low word or -double word of flags register at the top of stack, size of stored data -depends on the current code setting. "pushfw" variant forces storing the -word and "pushfd" forces storing the double word. - "popf" transfers specific bits from the word or double word at the top -of stack, then increments "esp" by two or four, this value depends on -the current code setting. "popfw" variant forces restoring from the word -and "popfd" forces restoring from the double word. - - -2.1.10 Conditional operations - - The instructions obtained by attaching the condition mnemonic (see table -2.1) to the "set" mnemonic set a byte to one if the condition is true and set -the byte to zero otherwise. The operand should be an 8-bit be general register -or the byte in memory. - - setne al ; set al if zero flag cleared - seto byte [bx] ; set byte if overflow - - "salc" instruction sets the all bits of AL register when the carry flag is -set and zeroes the AL register otherwise. This instruction has no arguments. - The instructions obtained by attaching the condition mnemonic to "cmov" -mnemonic transfer the word or double word from the general register or memory -to the general register only when the condition is true. The destination -operand should be general register, the source operand can be general register -or memory. - - cmove ax,bx ; move when zero flag set - cmovnc eax,[ebx] ; move when carry flag cleared - - "cmpxchg" compares the value in the AL, AX, or EAX register with the -destination operand. If the two values are equal, the source operand is -loaded into the destination operand. Otherwise, the destination operand is -loaded into the AL, AX, or EAX register. The destination operand may be a -general register or memory, the source operand must be a general register. - - cmpxchg dl,bl ; compare and exchange with register - cmpxchg [bx],dx ; compare and exchange with memory - - "cmpxchg8b" compares the 64-bit value in EDX and EAX registers with the -destination operand. If the values are equal, the 64-bit value in ECX and EBX -registers is stored in the destination operand. Otherwise, the value in the -destination operand is loaded into EDX and EAX registers. The destination -operand should be a quad word in memory. - - cmpxchg8b [bx] ; compare and exchange 8 bytes - - -2.1.11 Miscellaneous instructions - -"nop" instruction occupies one byte but affects nothing but the instruction -pointer. This instruction has no operands and doesn't perform any operation. - "ud2" instruction generates an invalid opcode exception. This instruction -is provided for software testing to explicitly generate an invalid opcode. -This is instruction has no operands. - "xlat" replaces a byte in the AL register with a byte indexed by its value -in a translation table addressed by BX or EBX. The operand should be a byte -memory addressed by BX or EBX with any segment prefix. This instruction has -also a short form "xlatb" which has no operands and uses the BX or EBX address -in the segment selected by DS depending on the current code setting. - "lds" transfers a pointer variable from the source operand to DS and the -destination register. The source operand must be a memory operand, and the -destination operand must be a general register. The DS register receives the -segment selector of the pointer while the destination register receives the -offset part of the pointer. "les", "lfs", "lgs" and "lss" operate identically -to "lds" except that rather than DS register the ES, FS, GS and SS is used -respectively. - - lds bx,[si] ; load pointer to ds:bx - - "lea" transfers the offset of the source operand (rather than its value) -to the destination operand. The source operand must be a memory operand, and -the destination operand must be a general register. - - lea dx,[bx+si+1] ; load effective address to dx - - "cpuid" returns processor identification and feature information in the -EAX, EBX, ECX, and EDX registers. The information returned is selected by -entering a value in the EAX register before the instruction is executed. -This instruction has no operands. - "pause" instruction delays the execution of the next instruction an -implementation specific amount of time. It can be used to improve the -performance of spin wait loops. This instruction has no operands. - "enter" creates a stack frame that may be used to implement the scope rules -of block-structured high-level languages. A "leave" instruction at the end of -a procedure complements an "enter" at the beginning of the procedure to -simplify stack management and to control access to variables for nested -procedures. The "enter" instruction includes two parameters. The first -parameter specifies the number of bytes of dynamic storage to be allocated on -the stack for the routine being entered. The second parameter corresponds to -the lexical nesting level of the routine, it can be in range from 0 to 31. -The specified lexical level determines how many sets of stack frame pointers -the CPU copies into the new stack frame from the preceding frame. This list -of stack frame pointers is sometimes called the display. The first word (or -double word when code is 32-bit) of the display is a pointer to the last stack -frame. This pointer enables a "leave" instruction to reverse the action of the -previous "enter" instruction by effectively discarding the last stack frame. -After "enter" creates the new display for a procedure, it allocates the -dynamic storage space for that procedure by decrementing ESP by the number of -bytes specified in the first parameter. To enable a procedure to address its -display, "enter" leaves BP (or EBP) pointing to the beginning of the new stack -frame. If the lexical level is zero, "enter" pushes BP (or EBP), copies SP to -BP (or ESP to EBP) and then subtracts the first operand from ESP. For nesting -levels greater than zero, the processor pushes additional frame pointers on -the stack before adjusting the stack pointer. - - enter 2048,0 ; enter and allocate 2048 bytes on stack - - -2.1.12 System instructions - -"lmsw" loads the operand into the machine status word (bits 0 through 15 of -CR0 register), while "smsw" stores the machine status word into the -destination operand. The operand for both those instructions can be 16-bit -general register or memory, for "smsw" it can also be 32-bit general -register. - - lmsw ax ; load machine status from register - smsw [bx] ; store machine status to memory - - "lgdt" and "lidt" instructions load the values in operand into the global -descriptor table register or the interrupt descriptor table register -respectively. "sgdt" and "sidt" store the contents of the global descriptor -table register or the interrupt descriptor table register in the destination -operand. The operand should be a 6 bytes in memory. - - lgdt [ebx] ; load global descriptor table - - "lldt" loads the operand into the segment selector field of the local -descriptor table register and "sldt" stores the segment selector from the -local descriptor table register in the operand. "ltr" loads the operand into -the segment selector field of the task register and "str" stores the segment -selector from the task register in the operand. Rules for operand are the same -as for the "lmsw" and "smsw" instructions. - "lar" loads the access rights from the segment descriptor specified by -the selector in source operand into the destination operand and sets the ZF -flag. The destination operand can be a 16-bit or 32-bit general register. -The source operand should be a 16-bit general register or memory. - - lar ax,[bx] ; load access rights into word - lar eax,dx ; load access rights into double word - - "lsl" loads the segment limit from the segment descriptor specified by the -selector in source operand into the destination operand and sets the ZF flag. -Rules for operand are the same as for the "lar" instruction. - "verr" and "verw" verify whether the code or data segment specified with -the operand is readable or writable from the current privilege level. The -operand should be a word, it can be general register or memory. If the segment -is accessible and readable (for "verr") or writable (for "verw") the ZF flag -is set, otherwise it's cleared. Rules for operand are the same as for the -"lldt" instruction. - "arpl" compares the RPL (requestor's privilege level) fields of two segment -selectors. The first operand contains one segment selector and the second -operand contains the other. If the RPL field of the destination operand is -less than the RPL field of the source operand, the ZF flag is set and the RPL -field of the destination operand is increased to match that of the source -operand. Otherwise, the ZF flag is cleared and no change is made to the -destination operand. The destination operand can be a word general register -or memory, the source operand must be a general register. - - arpl bx,ax ; adjust RPL of selector in register - arpl [bx],ax ; adjust RPL of selector in memory - - "clts" clears the TS (task switched) flag in the CR0 register. This -instruction has no operands. - "lock" prefix causes the processor's bus-lock signal to be asserted during -execution of the accompanying instruction. In a multiprocessor environment, -the bus-lock signal insures that the processor has exclusive use of any shared -memory while the signal is asserted. The "lock" prefix can be prepended only -to the following instructions and only to those forms of the instructions -where the destination operand is a memory operand: "add", "adc", "and", "btc", -"btr", "bts", "cmpxchg", "cmpxchg8b", "dec", "inc", "neg", "not", "or", "sbb", -"sub", "xor", "xadd" and "xchg". If the "lock" prefix is used with one of -these instructions and the source operand is a memory operand, an undefined -opcode exception may be generated. An undefined opcode exception will also be -generated if the "lock" prefix is used with any instruction not in the above -list. The "xchg" instruction always asserts the bus-lock signal regardless of -the presence or absence of the "lock" prefix. - "hlt" stops instruction execution and places the processor in a halted -state. An enabled interrupt, a debug exception, the BINIT, INIT or the RESET -signal will resume execution. This instruction has no operands. - "invlpg" invalidates (flushes) the TLB (translation lookaside buffer) entry -specified with the operand, which should be a memory. The processor determines -the page that contains that address and flushes the TLB entry for that page. - "rdmsr" loads the contents of a 64-bit MSR (model specific register) of the -address specified in the ECX register into registers EDX and EAX. "wrmsr" -writes the contents of registers EDX and EAX into the 64-bit MSR of the -address specified in the ECX register. "rdtsc" loads the current value of the -processor's time stamp counter from the 64-bit MSR into the EDX and EAX -registers. The processor increments the time stamp counter MSR every clock -cycle and resets it to 0 whenever the processor is reset. "rdpmc" loads the -contents of the 40-bit performance monitoring counter specified in the ECX -register into registers EDX and EAX. These instructions have no operands. - "wbinvd" writes back all modified cache lines in the processor's internal -cache to main memory and invalidates (flushes) the internal caches. The -instruction then issues a special function bus cycle that directs external -caches to also write back modified data and another bus cycle to indicate that -the external caches should be invalidated. This instruction has no operands. - "rsm" return program control from the system management mode to the program -that was interrupted when the processor received an SMM interrupt. This -instruction has no operands. - "sysenter" executes a fast call to a level 0 system procedure, "sysexit" -executes a fast return to level 3 user code. The addresses used by these -instructions are stored in MSRs. These instructions have no operands. - - -2.1.13 FPU instructions - -The FPU (Floating-Point Unit) instructions operate on the floating-point -values in three formats: single precision (32-bit), double precision (64-bit) -and double extended precision (80-bit). The FPU registers form the stack and -each of them holds the double extended precision floating-point value. When -some values are pushed onto the stack or are removed from the top, the FPU -registers are shifted, so ST0 is always the value on the top of FPU stack, ST1 -is the first value below the top, etc. The ST0 name has also the synonym ST. - "fld" pushes the floating-point value onto the FPU register stack. The -operand can be 32-bit, 64-bit or 80-bit memory location or the FPU register, -its value is then loaded onto the top of FPU register stack (the ST0 -register) and is automatically converted into the double extended precision -format. - - fld dword [bx] ; load single prevision value from memory - fld st2 ; push value of st2 onto register stack - - "fld1", "fldz", "fldl2t", "fldl2e", "fldpi", "fldlg2" and "fldln2" load the -commonly used contants onto the FPU register stack. The loaded constants are -+1.0, +0.0, lb 10, lb e, pi, lg 2 and ln 2 respectively. These instructions -have no operands. - "fild" converts the signed integer source operand into double extended -precision floating-point format and pushes the result onto the FPU register -stack. The source operand can be a 16-bit, 32-bit or 64-bit memory location. - - fild qword [bx] ; load 64-bit integer from memory - - "fst" copies the value of ST0 register to the destination operand, which -can be 32-bit or 64-bit memory location or another FPU register. "fstp" -performs the same operation as "fst" and then pops the register stack, -getting rid of ST0. "fstp" accepts the same operands as the "fst" instruction -and can also store value in the 80-bit memory. - - fst st3 ; copy value of st0 into st3 register - fstp tword [bx] ; store value in memory and pop stack - - "fist" converts the value in ST0 to a signed integer and stores the result -in the destination operand. The operand can be 16-bit or 32-bit memory -location. "fistp" performs the same operation and then pops the register -stack, it accepts the same operands as the "fist" instruction and can also -store integer value in the 64-bit memory, so it has the same rules for -operands as "fild" instruction. - "fbld" converts the packed BCD integer into double extended precision -floating-point format and pushes this value onto the FPU stack. "fbstp" -converts the value in ST0 to an 18-digit packed BCD integer, stores the result -in the destination operand, and pops the register stack. The operand should be -an 80-bit memory location. - "fadd" adds the destination and source operand and stores the sum in the -destination location. The destination operand is always an FPU register, if -the source is a memory location, the destination is ST0 register and only -source operand should be specified. If both operands are FPU registers, at -least one of them should be ST0 register. An operand in memory can be a -32-bit or 64-bit value. - - fadd qword [bx] ; add double precision value to st0 - fadd st2,st0 ; add st0 to st2 - - "faddp" adds the destination and source operand, stores the sum in the -destination location and then pops the register stack. The destination operand -must be an FPU register and the source operand must be the ST0. When no -operands are specified, ST1 is used as a destination operand. - - faddp ; add st0 to st1 and pop the stack - faddp st2,st0 ; add st0 to st2 and pop the stack - -"fiadd" instruction converts an integer source operand into double extended -precision floating-point value and adds it to the destination operand. The -operand should be a 16-bit or 32-bit memory location. - - fiadd word [bx] ; add word integer to st0 - - "fsub", "fsubr", "fmul", "fdiv", "fdivr" instruction are similar to "fadd", -have the same rules for operands and differ only in the perfomed computation. -"fsub" substracts the source operand from the destination operand, "fsubr" -substract the destination operand from the source operand, "fmul" multiplies -the destination and source operands, "fdiv" divides the destination operand by -the source operand and "fdivr" divides the source operand by the destination -operand. "fsubp", "fsubrp", "fmulp", "fdivp", "fdivrp" perform the same -operations and pop the register stack, the rules for operand are the same as -for the "faddp" instruction. "fisub", "fisubr", "fimul", "fidiv", "fidivr" -perform these operations after converting the integer source operand into -floating-point value, they have the same rules for operands as "fiadd" -instruction. - "fsqrt" computes the square root of the value in ST0 register, "fsin" -computes the sine of that value, "fcos" computes the cosine of that value, -"fchs" complements its sign bit, "fabs" clears its sign to create the absolute -value, "frndint" rounds it to the nearest integral value, depending on the -current rounding mode. "f2xm1" computes the exponential value of 2 to the -power of ST0 and substracts the 1.0 from it, the value of ST0 must lie in the -range -1.0 to +1.0. All these instruction store the result in ST0 and have no -operands. - "fsincos" computes both the sine and the cosine of the value in ST0 -register, stores the sine in ST0 and pushes the cosine on the top of FPU -register stack. "fptan" computes the tangent of the value in ST0, stores the -result in ST0 and pushes a 1.0 onto the FPU register stack. "fpatan" computes -the arctangent of the value in ST1 divided by the value in ST0, stores the -result in ST1 and pops the FPU register stack. "fyl2x" computes the binary -logarithm of ST0, multiplies it by ST1, stores the result in ST1 and pops the -FPU register stack; "fyl2xp1" performs the same operation but it adds 1.0 to -ST0 before computing the logarithm. "fprem" computes the remainder obtained -from dividing the value in ST0 by the value in ST1, and stores the result -in ST0. "fprem1" performs the same operation as "fprem", but it computes the -remainder in the way specified by IEEE Standard 754. "fscale" truncates the -value in ST1 and increases the exponent of ST0 by this value. "fxtract" -separates the value in ST0 into its exponent and significand, stores the -exponent in ST0 and pushes the significand onto the register stack. "fnop" -performs no operation. These instruction have no operands. - "fxch" exchanges the contents of ST0 an another FPU register. The operand -should be an FPU register, if no operand is specified, the contents of ST0 and -ST1 are exchanged. - "fcom" and "fcomp" compare the contents of ST0 and the source operand and -set flags in the FPU status word according to the results. "fcomp" -additionally pops the register stack after performing the comparison. The -operand can be a single or double precision value in memory or the FPU -register. When no operand is specified, ST1 is used as a source operand. - - fcom ; compare st0 with st1 - fcomp st2 ; compare st0 with st2 and pop stack - - "fcompp" compares the contents of ST0 and ST1, sets flags in the FPU status -word according to the results and pops the register stack twice. This -instruction has no operands. - "fucom", "fucomp" and "fucompp" performs an unordered comparison of two FPU -registers. Rules for operands are the same as for the "fcom", "fcomp" and -"fcompp", but the source operand must be an FPU register. - "ficom" and "ficomp" compare the value in ST0 with an integer source operand -and set the flags in the FPU status word according to the results. "ficomp" -additionally pops the register stack after performing the comparison. The -integer value is converted to double extended precision floating-point format -before the comparison is made. The operand should be a 16-bit or 32-bit -memory location. - - ficom word [bx] ; compare st0 with 16-bit integer - - "fcomi", "fcomip", "fucomi", "fucomip" perform the comparison of ST0 with -another FPU register and set the ZF, PF and CF flags according to the results. -"fcomip" and "fucomip" additionaly pop the register stack after performing the -comparison. The instructions obtained by attaching the FPU condition mnemonic -(see table 2.2) to the "fcmov" mnemonic transfer the specified FPU register -into ST0 register if the fiven test condition is true. These instruction -allow two different syntaxes, one with single operand specifying the source -FPU register, and one with two operands, in that case destination operand -should be ST0 register and the second operand specifies the source FPU -register. - - fcomi st2 ; compare st0 with st2 and set flags - fcmovb st0,st2 ; transfer st2 to st0 if below - - Table 2.2 FPU conditions - /------------------------------------------------------\ - | Mnemonic | Condition tested | Description | - |==========|==================|========================| - | b | CF = 1 | below | - | e | ZF = 1 | equal | - | be | CF or ZF = 1 | below or equal | - | u | PF = 1 | unordered | - | nb | CF = 0 | not below | - | ne | ZF = 0 | not equal | - | nbe | CF and ZF = 0 | not below nor equal | - | nu | PF = 0 | not unordered | - \------------------------------------------------------/ - - "ftst" compares the value in ST0 with 0.0 and sets the flags in the FPU -status word according to the results. "fxam" examines the contents of the ST0 -and sets the flags in FPU status word to indicate the class of value in the -register. These instructions have no operands. - "fstsw" and "fnstsw" store the current value of the FPU status word in the -destination location. The destination operand can be either a 16-bit memory or -the AX register. "fstsw" checks for pending umasked FPU exceptions before -storing the status word, "fnstsw" does not. - "fstcw" and "fnstcw" store the current value of the FPU control word at the -specified destination in memory. "fstcw" checks for pending umasked FPU -exceptions before storing the control word, "fnstcw" does not. "fldcw" loads -the operand into the FPU control word. The operand should be a 16-bit memory -location. - "fstenv" and "fnstenv" store the current FPU operating environment at the -memory location specified with the destination operand, and then mask all FPU -exceptions. "fstenv" checks for pending umasked FPU exceptions before -proceeding, "fnstenv" does not. "fldenv" loads the complete operating -environment from memory into the FPU. "fsave" and "fnsave" store the current -FPU state (operating environment and register stack) at the specified -destination in memory and reinitializes the FPU. "fsave" check for pending -unmasked FPU exceptions before proceeding, "fnsave" does not. "frstor" -loads the FPU state from the specified memory location. All these instructions -need an operand being a memory location. For each of these instruction -exist two additional mnemonics that allow to precisely select the type of the -operation. The "fstenvw", "fnstenvw", "fldenvw", "fsavew", "fnsavew" and -"frstorw" mnemonics force the instruction to perform operation as in the 16-bit -mode, while "fstenvd", "fnstenvd", "fldenvd", "fsaved", "fnsaved" and "frstord" -force the operation as in 32-bit mode. - "finit" and "fninit" set the FPU operating environment into its default -state. "finit" checks for pending unmasked FPU exception before proceeding, -"fninit" does not. "fclex" and "fnclex" clear the FPU exception flags in the -FPU status word. "fclex" checks for pending unmasked FPU exception before -proceeding, "fnclex" does not. "wait" and "fwait" are synonyms for the same -instruction, which causes the processor to check for pending unmasked FPU -exceptions and handle them before proceeding. These instruction have no -operands. - "ffree" sets the tag associated with specified FPU register to empty. The -operand should be an FPU register. - "fincstp" and "fdecstp" rotate the FPU stack by one by adding or -substracting one to the pointer of the top of stack. These instruction have no -operands. - - -2.1.14 MMX instructions - -The MMX instructions operate on the packed integer types and use the MMX -registers, which are the low 64-bit parts of the 80-bit FPU registers. Because -of this MMX instructions cannot be used at the same time as FPU instructions. -They can operate on packed bytes (eight 8-bit integers), packed words (four -16-bit integers) or packed double words (two 32-bit integers), use of packed -formats allows to perform operations on multiple data at one time. - "movq" copies a quad word from the source operand to the destination -operand. At least one of the operands must be a MMX register, the second one -can be also a MMX register or 64-bit memory location. - - movq mm0,mm1 ; move quad word from register to register - movq mm2,[ebx] ; move quad word from memory to register - - "movd" copies a double word from the source operand to the destination -operand. One of the operands must be a MMX register, the second one can be a -general register or 32-bit memory location. Only low double word of MMX -register is used. - All general MMX operations have two operands, the destination operand should -be a MMX register, the source operand can be a MMX register or 64-bit memory -location. Operation is performed on the corresponding data elements of the -source and destination operand and stored in the data elements of the -destination operand. "paddb", "paddw" and "paddd" perform the addition of -packed bytes, packed words, or packed double words. "psubb", "psubw" and -"psubd" perform the substraction of appropriate types. "paddsb", "paddsw", -"psubsb" and "psubsw" perform the addition or substraction of packed bytes -or packed words with the signed saturation. "paddusb", "paddusw", "psubusb", -"psubusw" are analoguous, but with unsigned saturation. "pmulhw" and "pmullw" -performs a signed multiplication of the packed words and store the high or low -words of the results in the destination operand. "pmaddwd" performs a multiply -of the packed words and adds the four intermediate double word products in -pairs to produce result as a packed double words. "pand", "por" and "pxor" -perform the logical operations on the quad words, "pandn" peforms also a -logical negation of the destination operand before performing the "and" -operation. "pcmpeqb", "pcmpeqw" and "pcmpeqd" compare for equality of packed -bytes, packed words or packed double words. If a pair of data elements is -equal, the corresponding data element in the destination operand is filled with -bits of value 1, otherwise it's set to 0. "pcmpgtb", "pcmpgtw" and "pcmpgtd" -perform the similar operation, but they check whether the data elements in the -destination operand are greater than the correspoding data elements in the -source operand. "packsswb" converts packed signed words into packed signed -bytes, "packssdw" converts packed signed double words into packed signed -words, using saturation to handle overflow conditions. "packuswb" converts -packed signed words into packed unsigned bytes. Converted data elements from -the source operand are stored in the low part of the destination operand, -while converted data elements from the destination operand are stored in the -high part. "punpckhbw", "punpckhwd" and "punpckhdq" interleaves the data -elements from the high parts of the source and destination operands and -stores the result into the destination operand. "punpcklbw", "punpcklwd" and -"punpckldq" perform the same operation, but the low parts of the source and -destination operand are used. - - paddsb mm0,[esi] ; add packed bytes with signed saturation - pcmpeqw mm3,mm7 ; compare packed words for equality - - "psllw", "pslld" and "psllq" perform logical shift left of the packed words, -packed double words or a single quad word in the destination operand by the -amount specified in the source operand. "psrlw", "psrld" and "psrlq" perform -logical shift right of the packed words, packed double words or a single quad -word. "psraw" and "psrad" perform arithmetic shift of the packed words or -double words. The destination operand should be a MMX register, while source -operand can be a MMX register, 64-bit memory location, or 8-bit immediate -value. - - psllw mm2,mm4 ; shift words left logically - psrad mm4,[ebx] ; shift double words right arithmetically - - "emms" makes the FPU registers usable for the FPU instructions, it must be -used before using the FPU instructions if any MMX instructions were used. - - -2.1.15 SSE instructions - -The SSE extension adds more MMX instructions and also introduces the -operations on packed single precision floating point values. The 128-bit -packed single precision format consists of four single precision floating -point values. The 128-bit SSE registers are designed for the purpose of -operations on this data type. - "movaps" and "movups" transfer a double quad word operand containing packed -single precision values from source operand to destination operand. At least -one of the operands have to be a SSE register, the second one can be also a -SSE register or 128-bit memory location. Memory operands for "movaps" -instruction must be aligned on boundary of 16 bytes, operands for "movups" -instruction don't have to be aligned. - - movups xmm0,[ebx] ; move unaligned double quad word - - "movlps" moves packed two single precision values between the memory and the -low quad word of SSE register. "movhps" moved packed two single precision -values between the memory and the high quad word of SSE register. One of the -operands must be a SSE register, and the other operand must be a 64-bit memory -location. - - movlps xmm0,[ebx] ; move memory to low quad word of xmm0 - movhps [esi],xmm7 ; move high quad word of xmm7 to memory - - "movlhps" moves packed two single precision values from the low quad word -of source register to the high quad word of destination register. "movhlps" -moves two packed single precision values from the high quad word of source -register to the low quad word of destination register. Both operands have to -be a SSE registers. - "movmskps" transfers the most significant bit of each of the four single -precision values in the SSE register into low four bits of a general register. -The source operand must be a SSE register, the destination operand must be a -general register. - "movss" transfers a single precision value between source and destination -operand (only the low double word is trasferred). At least one of the operands -have to be a SSE register, the second one can be also a SSE register or 32-bit -memory location. - - movss [edi],xmm3 ; move low double word of xmm3 to memory - - Each of the SSE arithmetic operations has two variants. When the mnemonic -ends with "ps", the source operand can be a 128-bit memory location or a SSE -register, the destination operand must be a SSE register and the operation is -performed on packed four single precision values, for each pair of the -corresponding data elements separately, the result is stored in the -destination register. When the mnemonic ends with "ss", the source operand -can be a 32-bit memory location or a SSE register, the destination operand -must be a SSE register and the operation is performed on single precision -values, only low double words of SSE registers are used in this case, the -result is stored in the low double word of destination register. "addps" and -"addss" add the values, "subps" and "subss" substract the source value from -destination value, "mulps" and "mulss" multiply the values, "divps" and -"divss" divide the destination value by the source value, "rcpps" and "rcpss" -compute the approximate reciprocal of the source value, "sqrtps" and "sqrtss" -compute the square root of the source value, "rsqrtps" and "rsqrtss" compute -the approximate reciprocal of square root of the source value, "maxps" and -"maxss" compare the source and destination values and return the greater one, -"minps" and "minss" compare the source and destination values and return the -lesser one. - - mulss xmm0,[ebx] ; multiply single precision values - addps xmm3,xmm7 ; add packed single precision values - - "andps", "andnps", "orps" and "xorps" perform the logical operations on -packed single precision values. The source operand can be a 128-bit memory -location or a SSE register, the destination operand must be a SSE register. - "cmpps" compares packed single precision values and returns a mask result -into the destination operand, which must be a SSE register. The source operand -can be a 128-bit memory location or SSE register, the third operand must be an -immediate operand selecting code of one of the eight compare conditions -(table 2.3). "cmpss" performs the same operation on single precision values, -only low double word of destination register is affected, in this case source -operand can be a 32-bit memory location or SSE register. These two -instructions have also variants with only two operands and the condition -encoded within mnemonic. Their mnemonics are obtained by attaching the -mnemonic from table 2.3 to the "cmp" mnemonic and then attaching the "ps" or -"ss" at the end. - - cmpps xmm2,xmm4,0 ; compare packed single precision values - cmpltss xmm0,[ebx] ; compare single precision values - - Table 2.3 SSE conditions - /-------------------------------------------\ - | Code | Mnemonic | Description | - |======|==========|=========================| - | 0 | eq | equal | - | 1 | lt | less than | - | 2 | le | less than or equal | - | 3 | unord | unordered | - | 4 | neq | not equal | - | 5 | nlt | not less than | - | 6 | nle | not less than nor equal | - | 7 | ord | ordered | - \-------------------------------------------/ - - "comiss" and "ucomiss" compare the single precision values and set the ZF, -PF and CF flags to show the result. The destination operand must be a SSE -register, the source operand can be a 32-bit memory location or SSE register. - "shufps" moves any two of the four single precision values from the -destination operand into the low quad word of the destination operand, and any -two of the four values from the source operand into the high quad word of the -destination operand. The destination operand must be a SSE register, the -source operand can be a 128-bit memory location or SSE register, the third -operand must be an 8-bit immediate value selecting which values will be moved -into the destination operand. Bits 0 and 1 select the value to be moved from -destination operand to the low double word of the result, bits 2 and 3 select -the value to be moved from the destination operand to the second double word, -bits 4 and 5 select the value to be moved from the source operand to the third -double word, and bits 6 and 7 select the value to be moved from the source -operand to the high double word of the result. - - shufps xmm0,xmm0,10010011b ; shuffle double words - - "unpckhps" performs an interleaved unpack of the values from the high parts -of the source and destination operands and stores the result in the -destination operand, which must be a SSE register. The source operand can be -a 128-bit memory location or a SSE register. "unpcklps" performs an -interleaved unpack of the values from the low parts of the source and -destination operand and stores the result in the destination operand, -the rules for operands are the same. - "cvtpi2ps" converts packed two double word integers into the the packed two -single precision floating point values and stores the result in the low quad -word of the destination operand, which should be a SSE register. The source -operand can be a 64-bit memory location or MMX register. - - cvtpi2ps xmm0,mm0 ; convert integers to single precision values - - "cvtsi2ss" converts a double word integer into a single precision floating -point value and stores the result in the low double word of the destination -operand, which should be a SSE register. The source operand can be a 32-bit -memory location or 32-bit general register. - - cvtsi2ss xmm0,eax ; convert integer to single precision value - - "cvtps2pi" converts packed two single precision floating point values into -packed two double word integers and stores the result in the destination -operand, which should be a MMX register. The source operand can be a 64-bit -memory location or SSE register, only low quad word of SSE register is used. -"cvttps2pi" performs the similar operation, except that truncation is used to -round a source values to integers, rules for the operands are the same. - - cvtps2pi mm0,xmm0 ; convert single precision values to integers - - "cvtss2si" convert a single precision floating point value into a double -word integer and stores the result in the destination operand, which should be -a 32-bit general register. The source operand can be a 32-bit memory location -or SSE register, only low double word of SSE register is used. "cvttss2si" -performs the similar operation, except that truncation is used to round a -source value to integer, rules for the operands are the same. - - cvtss2si eax,xmm0 ; convert single precision value to integer - - "pextrw" copies the word in the source operand specified by the third -operand to the destination operand. The source operand must be a MMX register, -the destination operand must be a 32-bit general register (the high word of -the destination is cleared), the third operand must an 8-bit immediate value. - - pextrw eax,mm0,1 ; extract word into eax - - "pinsrw" inserts a word from the source operand in the destination operand -at the location specified with the third operand, which must be an 8-bit -immediate value. The destination operand must be a MMX register, the source -operand can be a 16-bit memory location or 32-bit general register (only low -word of the register is used). - - pinsrw mm1,ebx,2 ; insert word from ebx - - "pavgb" and "pavgw" compute average of packed bytes or words. "pmaxub" -return the maximum values of packed unsigned bytes, "pminub" returns the -minimum values of packed unsigned bytes, "pmaxsw" returns the maximum values -of packed signed words, "pminsw" returns the minimum values of packed signed -words. "pmulhuw" performs a unsigned multiplication of the packed words and -stores the high words of the results in the destination operand. "psadbw" -computes the absolute differences of packed unsigned bytes, sums the -differences, and stores the sum in the low word of destination operand. All -these instructions follow the same rules for operands as the general MMX -operations described in previous section. - "pmovmskb" creates a mask made of the most significant bit of each byte in -the source operand and stores the result in the low byte of destination -operand. The source operand must be a MMX register, the destination operand -must a 32-bit general register. - "pshufw" inserts words from the source operand in the destination operand -from the locations specified with the third operand. The destination operand -must be a MMX register, the source operand can be a 64-bit memory location or -MMX register, third operand must an 8-bit immediate value selecting which -values will be moved into destination operand, in the similar way as the third -operand of the "shufps" instruction. - "movntq" moves the quad word from the source operand to memory using a -non-temporal hint to minimize cache pollution. The source operand should be a -MMX register, the destination operand should be a 64-bit memory location. -"movntps" stores packed single precision values from the SSE register to -memory using a non-temporal hint. The source operand should be a SSE register, -the destination operand should be a 128-bit memory location. "maskmovq" stores -selected bytes from the first operand into a 64-bit memory location using a -non-temporal hint. Both operands should be a MMX registers, the second operand -selects wich bytes from the source operand are written to memory. The -memory location is pointed by DI (or EDI) register in the segment selected -by DS. - "prefetcht0", "prefetcht1", "prefetcht2" and "prefetchnta" fetch the line -of data from memory that contains byte specified with the operand to a -specified location in hierarchy. The operand should be an 8-bit memory -location. - "sfence" performs a serializing operation on all instruction storing to -memory that were issued prior to it. This instruction has no operands. - "ldmxcsr" loads the 32-bit memory operand into the MXCSR register. "stmxcsr" -stores the contents of MXCSR into a 32-bit memory operand. - "fxsave" saves the current state of the FPU, MXCSR register, and all the FPU -and SSE registers to a 512-byte memory location specified in the destination -operand. "fxrstor" reloads data previously stored with "fxsave" instruction -from the specified 512-byte memory location. The memory operand for both those -instructions must be aligned on 16 byte boundary, it should declare operand -of no specified size. - - -2.1.16 SSE2 instructions - -The SSE2 extension introduces the operations on packed double precision -floating point values, extends the syntax of MMX instructions, and adds also -some new instructions. - "movapd" and "movupd" transfer a double quad word operand containing packed -double precision values from source operand to destination operand. These -instructions are analogous to "movaps" and "movups" and have the same rules -for operands. - "movlpd" moves double precision value between the memory and the low quad -word of SSE register. "movhpd" moved double precision value between the memory -and the high quad word of SSE register. These instructions are analogous to -"movlps" and "movhps" and have the same rules for operands. - "movmskpd" transfers the most significant bit of each of the two double -precision values in the SSE register into low two bits of a general register. -This instruction is analogous to "movmskps" and has the same rules for -operands. - "movsd" transfers a double precision value between source and destination -operand (only the low quad word is trasferred). At least one of the operands -have to be a SSE register, the second one can be also a SSE register or 64-bit -memory location. - Arithmetic operations on double precision values are: "addpd", "addsd", -"subpd", "subsd", "mulpd", "mulsd", "divpd", "divsd", "sqrtpd", "sqrtsd", -"maxpd", "maxsd", "minpd", "minsd", and they are analoguous to arithmetic -operations on single precision values described in previous section. When the -mnemonic ends with "pd" instead of "ps", the operation is performed on packed -two double precision values, but rules for operands are the same. When the -mnemonic ends with "sd" instead of "ss", the source operand can be a 64-bit -memory location or a SSE register, the destination operand must be a SSE -register and the operation is performed on double precision values, only low -quad words of SSE registers are used in this case. - "andpd", "andnpd", "orpd" and "xorpd" perform the logical operations on -packed double precision values. They are analoguous to SSE logical operations -on single prevision values and have the same rules for operands. - "cmppd" compares packed double precision values and returns and returns a -mask result into the destination operand. This instruction is analoguous to -"cmpps" and has the same rules for operands. "cmpsd" performs the same -operation on double precision values, only low quad word of destination -register is affected, in this case source operand can be a 64-bit memory or -SSE register. Variant with only two operands are obtained by attaching the -condition mnemonic from table 2.3 to the "cmp" mnemonic and then attaching -the "pd" or "sd" at the end. - "comisd" and "ucomisd" compare the double precision values and set the ZF, -PF and CF flags to show the result. The destination operand must be a SSE -register, the source operand can be a 128-bit memory location or SSE register. - "shufpd" moves any of the two double precision values from the destination -operand into the low quad word of the destination operand, and any of the two -values from the source operand into the high quad word of the destination -operand. This instruction is analoguous to "shufps" and has the same rules for -operand. Bit 0 of the third operand selects the value to be moved from the -destination operand, bit 1 selects the value to be moved from the source -operand, the rest of bits are reserved and must be zeroed. - "unpckhpd" performs an unpack of the high quad words from the source and -destination operands, "unpcklpd" performs an unpack of the low quad words from -the source and destination operands. They are analoguous to "unpckhps" and -"unpcklps", and have the same rules for operands. - "cvtps2pd" converts the packed two single precision floating point values to -two packed double precision floating point values, the destination operand -must be a SSE register, the source operand can be a 64-bit memory location or -SSE register. "cvtpd2ps" converts the packed two double precision floating -point values to packed two single precision floating point values, the -destination operand must be a SSE register, the source operand can be a -128-bit memory location or SSE register. "cvtss2sd" converts the single -precision floating point value to double precision floating point value, the -destination operand must be a SSE register, the source operand can be a 32-bit -memory location or SSE register. "cvtsd2ss" converts the double precision -floating point value to single precision floating point value, the destination -operand must be a SSE register, the source operand can be 64-bit memory -location or SSE register. - "cvtpi2pd" converts packed two double word integers into the the packed -double precision floating point values, the destination operand must be a SSE -register, the source operand can be a 64-bit memory location or MMX register. -"cvtsi2sd" converts a double word integer into a double precision floating -point value, the destination operand must be a SSE register, the source -operand can be a 32-bit memory location or 32-bit general register. "cvtpd2pi" -converts packed double precision floating point values into packed two double -word integers, the destination operand should be a MMX register, the source -operand can be a 128-bit memory location or SSE register. "cvttpd2pi" performs -the similar operation, except that truncation is used to round a source values -to integers, rules for operands are the same. "cvtsd2si" converts a double -precision floating point value into a double word integer, the destination -operand should be a 32-bit general register, the source operand can be a -64-bit memory location or SSE register. "cvttsd2si" performs the similar -operation, except that truncation is used to round a source value to integer, -rules for operands are the same. - "cvtps2dq" and "cvttps2dq" convert packed single precision floating point -values to packed four double word integers, storing them in the destination -operand. "cvtpd2dq" and "cvttpd2dq" convert packed double precision floating -point values to packed two double word integers, storing the result in the low -quad word of the destination operand. "cvtdq2ps" converts packed four -double word integers to packed single precision floating point values. -For all these instruction destination operand must be a SSE register, the -source operand can be a 128-bit memory location or SSE register. -"cvtdq2pd" converts packed two double word integers from the source operand to -packed double precision floating point values, the source can be a 64-bit -memory location or SSE register, destination has to be SSE register. - "movdqa" and "movdqu" transfer a double quad word operand containing packed -integers from source operand to destination operand. At least one of the -operands have to be a SSE register, the second one can be also a SSE register -or 128-bit memory location. Memory operands for "movdqa" instruction must be -aligned on boundary of 16 bytes, operands for "movdqu" instruction don't have -to be aligned. - "movq2dq" moves the contents of the MMX source register to the low quad word -of destination SSE register. "movdq2q" moves the low quad word from the source -SSE register to the destination MMX register. - - movq2dq xmm0,mm1 ; move from MMX register to SSE register - movdq2q mm0,xmm1 ; move from SSE register to MMX register - - All MMX instructions operating on the 64-bit packed integers (those with -mnemonics starting with "p") are extended to operate on 128-bit packed -integers located in SSE registers. Additional syntax for these instructions -needs an SSE register where MMX register was needed, and the 128-bit memory -location or SSE register where 64-bit memory location or MMX register were -needed. The exception is "pshufw" instruction, which doesn't allow extended -syntax, but has two new variants: "pshufhw" and "pshuflw", which allow only -the extended syntax, and perform the same operation as "pshufw" on the high -or low quad words of operands respectively. Also the new instruction "pshufd" -is introduced, which performs the same operation as "pshufw", but on the -double words instead of words, it allows only the extended syntax. - - psubb xmm0,[esi] ; substract 16 packed bytes - pextrw eax,xmm0,7 ; extract highest word into eax - - "paddq" performs the addition of packed quad words, "psubq" performs the -substraction of packed quad words, "pmuludq" performs an unsigned -multiplication of low double words from each corresponding quad words and -returns the results in packed quad words. These instructions follow the same -rules for operands as the general MMX operations described in 2.1.14. - "pslldq" and "psrldq" perform logical shift left or right of the double -quad word in the destination operand by the amount of bytes specified in the -source operand. The destination operand should be a SSE register, source -operand should be an 8-bit immediate value. - "punpckhqdq" interleaves the high quad word of the source operand and the -high quad word of the destination operand and writes them to the destination -SSE register. "punpcklqdq" interleaves the low quad word of the source operand -and the low quad word of the destination operand and writes them to the -destination SSE register. The source operand can be a 128-bit memory location -or SSE register. - "movntdq" stores packed integer data from the SSE register to memory using -non-temporal hint. The source operand should be a SSE register, the -destination operand should be a 128-bit memory location. "movntpd" stores -packed double precision values from the SSE register to memory using a -non-temporal hint. Rules for operand are the same. "movnti" stores integer -from a general register to memory using a non-temporal hint. The source -operand should be a 32-bit general register, the destination operand should -be a 32-bit memory location. "maskmovdqu" stores selected bytes from the first -operand into a 128-bit memory location using a non-temporal hint. Both -operands should be a SSE registers, the second operand selects wich bytes from -the source operand are written to memory. The memory location is pointed by DI -(or EDI) register in the segment selected by DS and does not need to be -aligned. - "clflush" writes and invalidates the cache line associated with the address -of byte specified with the operand, which should be a 8-bit memory location. - "lfence" performs a serializing operation on all instruction loading from -memory that were issued prior to it. "mfence" performs a serializing operation -on all instruction accesing memory that were issued prior to it, and so it -combines the functions of "sfence" (described in previous section) and -"lfence" instructions. These instructions have no operands. - - -2.1.17 SSE3 instructions - -Prescott technology introduced some new instructions to improve the performance -of SSE and SSE2 - this extension is called SSE3. - "fisttp" behaves like the "fistp" instruction and accepts the same operands, -the only difference is that it always used truncation, irrespective of the -rounding mode. - "movshdup" loads into destination operand the 128-bit value obtained from -the source value of the same size by filling the each quad word with the two -duplicates of the value in its high double word. "movsldup" performs the same -action, except it duplicates the values of low double words. The destination -operand should be SSE register, the source operand can be SSE register or -128-bit memory location. - "movddup" loads the 64-bit source value and duplicates it into high and low -quad word of the destination operand. The destination operand should be SSE -register, the source operand can be SSE register or 64-bit memory location. - "lddqu" is functionally equivalent to "movdqu" with memory as source -operand, but it may improve performance when the source operand crosses a -cacheline boundary. The destination operand has to be SSE register, the source -operand must be 128-bit memory location. - "addsubps" performs single precision addition of second and fourth pairs and -single precision substracion of the first and third pairs of floating point -values in the operands. "addsubpd" performs double precision addition of the -second pair and double precision substraction of the first pair of floating -point values in the operand. "haddps" performs the addition of two single -precision values within the each quad word of source and destination operands, -and stores the results of such horizontal addition of values from destination -operand into low quad word of destination operand, and the results from the -source operand into high quad word of destination operand. "haddpd" performs -the addition of two double precision values within each operand, and stores -the result from destination operand into low quad word of destination operand, -and the result from source operand into high quad word of destination operand. -All these instruction need the destination operand to be SSE register, source -operand can be SSE register or 128-bit memory location. - "monitor" sets up an address range for monitoring of write-back stores. It -need its three operands to be EAX, ECX and EDX register in that order. "mwait" -waits for a write-back store to the address range set up by the "monitor" -instruction. It uses two operands with additional parameters, first being the -EAX and second the ECX register. - The functionality of SSE3 is further extended by the set of Supplemental -SSE3 instructions (SSSE3). They generally follow the same rules for operands -as all the MMX operations extended by SSE. - "phaddw" and "phaddd" perform the horizontal additional of the pairs of -adjacent values from both the source and destination operand, and stores the -sums into the destination (sums from the source operand go into lower part of -destination register). They operate on 16-bit or 32-bit chunks, respectively. -"phaddsw" performs the same operation on signed 16-bit packed values, but the -result of each addition is saturated. "phsubw" and "phsubd" analogously -perform the horizontal substraction of 16-bit or 32-bit packed value, and -"phsubsw" performs the horizontal substraction of signed 16-bit packed values -with saturation. - "pabsb", "pabsw" and "pabsd" calculate the absolute value of each signed -packed signed value in source operand and stores them into the destination -register. They operator on 8-bit, 16-bit and 32-bit elements respectively. - "pmaddubsw" multiplies signed 8-bit values from the source operand with the -corresponding unsigned 8-bit values from the destination operand to produce -intermediate 16-bit values, and every adjacent pair of those intermediate -values is then added horizontally and those 16-bit sums are stored into the -destination operand. - "pmulhrsw" multiplies corresponding 16-bit integers from the source and -destination operand to produce intermediate 32-bit values, and the 16 bits -next to the highest bit of each of those values are then rounded and packed -into the destination operand. - "pshufb" shuffles the bytes in the destination operand according to the -mask provided by source operand - each of the bytes in source operand is -an index of the target position for the corresponding byte in the destination. - "psignb", "psignw" and "psignd" perform the operation on 8-bit, 16-bit or -32-bit integers in destination operand, depending on the signs of the values -in the source. If the value in source is negative, the corresponding value in -the destination register is negated, if the value in source is positive, no -operation is performed on the corresponding value is performed, and if the -value in source is zero, the value in destination is zeroed, too. - "palignr" appends the source operand to the destination operand to form the -intermediate value of twice the size, and then extracts into the destination -register the 64 or 128 bits that are right-aligned to the byte offset -specified by the third operand, which should be an 8-bit immediate value. This -is the only SSSE3 instruction that takes three arguments. - - -2.1.18 AMD 3DNow! instructions - -The 3DNow! extension adds a new MMX instructions to those described in 2.1.14, -and introduces operation on the 64-bit packed floating point values, each -consisting of two single precision floating point values. - These instructions follow the same rules as the general MMX operations, the -destination operand should be a MMX register, the source operand can be a MMX -register or 64-bit memory location. "pavgusb" computes the rounded averages -of packed unsigned bytes. "pmulhrw" performs a signed multiplication of the -packed words, round the high word of each double word results and stores them -in the destination operand. "pi2fd" converts packed double word integers into -packed floating point values. "pf2id" converts packed floating point values -into packed double word integers using truncation. "pi2fw" converts packed -word integers into packed floating point values, only low words of each -double word in source operand are used. "pf2iw" converts packed floating -point values to packed word integers, results are extended to double words -using the sign extension. "pfadd" adds packed floating point values. "pfsub" -and "pfsubr" substracts packed floating point values, the first one substracts -source values from destination values, the second one substracts destination -values from the source values. "pfmul" multiplies packed floating point -values. "pfacc" adds the low and high floating point values of the destination -operand, storing the result in the low double word of destination, and adds -the low and high floating point values of the source operand, storing the -result in the high double word of destination. "pfnacc" substracts the high -floating point value of the destination operand from the low, storing the -result in the low double word of destination, and substracts the high floating -point value of the source operand from the low, storing the result in the high -double word of destination. "pfpnacc" substracts the high floating point value -of the destination operand from the low, storing the result in the low double -word of destination, and adds the low and high floating point values of the -source operand, storing the result in the high double word of destination. -"pfmax" and "pfmin" compute the maximum and minimum of floating point values. -"pswapd" reverses the high and low double word of the source operand. "pfrcp" -returns an estimates of the reciprocals of floating point values from the -source operand, "pfrsqrt" returns an estimates of the reciprocal square -roots of floating point values from the source operand, "pfrcpit1" performs -the first step in the Newton-Raphson iteration to refine the reciprocal -approximation produced by "pfrcp" instruction, "pfrsqit1" performs the first -step in the Newton-Raphson iteration to refine the reciprocal square root -approximation produced by "pfrsqrt" instruction, "pfrcpit2" performs the -second final step in the Newton-Raphson iteration to refine the reciprocal -approximation or the reciprocal square root approximation. "pfcmpeq", -"pfcmpge" and "pfcmpgt" compare the packed floating point values and sets -all bits or zeroes all bits of the correspoding data element in the -destination operand according to the result of comparison, first checks -whether values are equal, second checks whether destination value is greater -or equal to source value, third checks whether destination value is greater -than source value. - "prefetch" and "prefetchw" load the line of data from memory that contains -byte specified with the operand into the data cache, "prefetchw" instruction -should be used when the data in the cache line is expected to be modified, -otherwise the "prefetch" instruction should be used. The operand should be an -8-bit memory location. - "femms" performs a fast clear of MMX state. This instruction has no -operands. - - -2.1.19 The x86-64 long mode instructions - -The AMD64 and EM64T architectures (we will use the common name x86-64 for them -both) extend the x86 instruction set for the 64-bit processing. While legacy -and compatibility modes use the same set of registers and instructions, the -new long mode extends the x86 operations to 64 bits and introduces several new -registers. You can turn on generating the code for this mode with the "use64" -directive. - Each of the general purpose registers is extended to 64 bits and the eight -whole new general purpose registers and also eight new SSE registers are added. -See table 2.4 for the summary of new registers (only the ones that was not -listed in table 1.2). The general purpose registers of smallers sizes are the -low order portions of the larger ones. You can still access the "ah", "bh", -"ch" and "dh" registers in long mode, but you cannot use them in the same -instruction with any of the new registers. - - Table 2.4 New registers in long mode - /--------------------------------------------------\ - | Type | General | SSE | AVX | - |------|---------------------------|-------|-------| - | Bits | 8 | 16 | 32 | 64 | 128 | 256 | - |======|======|======|======|======|=======|=======| - | | | | | rax | | | - | | | | | rcx | | | - | | | | | rdx | | | - | | | | | rbx | | | - | | spl | | | rsp | | | - | | bpl | | | rbp | | | - | | sil | | | rsi | | | - | | dil | | | rdi | | | - | | r8b | r8w | r8d | r8 | xmm8 | ymm8 | - | | r9b | r9w | r9d | r9 | xmm9 | ymm9 | - | | r10b | r10w | r10d | r10 | xmm10 | ymm10 | - | | r11b | r11w | r11d | r11 | xmm11 | ymm11 | - | | r12b | r12w | r12d | r12 | xmm12 | ymm12 | - | | r13b | r13w | r13d | r13 | xmm13 | ymm13 | - | | r14b | r14w | r14d | r14 | xmm14 | ymm14 | - | | r15b | r15w | r15d | r15 | xmm15 | ymm15 | - \--------------------------------------------------/ - - In general any instruction from x86 architecture, which allowed 16-bit or -32-bit operand sizes, in long mode allows also the 64-bit operands. The 64-bit -registers should be used for addressing in long mode, the 32-bit addressing -is also allowed, but it's not possible to use the addresses based on 16-bit -registers. Below are the samples of new operations possible in long mode on the -example of "mov" instruction: - - mov rax,r8 ; transfer 64-bit general register - mov al,[rbx] ; transfer memory addressed by 64-bit register - -The long mode uses also the instruction pointer based addresses, you can -specify it manually with the special RIP register symbol, but such addressing -is also automatically generated by flat assembler, since there is no 64-bit -absolute addressing in long mode. You can still force the assembler to use the -32-bit absolute addressing by putting the "dword" size override for address -inside the square brackets. There is also one exception, where the 64-bit -absolute addressing is possible, it's the "mov" instruction with one of the -operand being accumulator register, and second being the memory operand. -To force the assembler to use the 64-bit absolute addressing there, use the -"qword" size operator for address inside the square brackets. When no size -operator is applied to address, assembler generates the optimal form -automatically. - - mov [qword 0],rax ; absolute 64-bit addressing - mov [dword 0],r15d ; absolute 32-bit addressing - mov [0],rsi ; automatic RIP-relative addressing - mov [rip+3],sil ; manual RIP-relative addressing - - Also as the immediate operands for 64-bit operations only the signed 32-bit -values are possible, with the only exception being the "mov" instruction with -destination operand being 64-bit general purpose register. Trying to force the -64-bit immediate with any other instruction will cause an error. - If any operation is performed on the 32-bit general registers in long mode, -the upper 32 bits of the 64-bit registers containing them are filled with -zeros. This is unlike the operations on 16-bit or 8-bit portions of those -registers, which preserve the upper bits. - Three new type conversion instructions are available. The "cdqe" sign -extends the double word in EAX into quad word and stores the result in RAX -register. "cqo" sign extends the quad word in RAX into double quad word and -stores the extra bits in the RDX register. These instructions have no -operands. "movsxd" sign extends the double word source operand, being either -the 32-bit register or memory, into 64-bit destination operand, which has to -be register. No analogous instruction is needed for the zero extension, since -it is done automatically by any operations on 32-bit registers, as noted in -previous paragraph. And the "movzx" and "movsx" instructions, conforming to -the general rule, can be used with 64-bit destination operand, allowing -extension of byte or word values into quad words. - All the binary arithmetic and logical instruction have been promoted to -allow 64-bit operands in long mode. The use of decimal arithmetic instructions -in long mode is prohibited. - The stack operations, like "push" and "pop" in long mode default to 64-bit -operands and it's not possible to use 32-bit operands with them. The "pusha" -and "popa" are disallowed in long mode. - The indirect near jumps and calls in long mode default to 64-bit operands -and it's not possible to use the 32-bit operands with them. On the other hand, -the indirect far jumps and calls allow any operands that were allowed by the -x86 architecture and also 80-bit memory operand is allowed (though only EM64T -seems to implement such variant), with the first eight bytes defining the -offset and two last bytes specifying the selector. The direct far jumps and -calls are not allowed in long mode. - The I/O instructions, "in", "out", "ins" and "outs" are the exceptional -instructions that are not extended to accept quad word operands in long mode. -But all other string operations are, and there are new short forms "movsq", -"cmpsq", "scasq", "lodsq" and "stosq" introduced for the variants of string -operations for 64-bit string elements. The RSI and RDI registers are used by -default to address the string elements. - The "lfs", "lgs" and "lss" instructions are extended to accept 80-bit source -memory operand with 64-bit destination register (though only EM64T seems to -implement such variant). The "lds" and "les" are disallowed in long mode. - The system instructions like "lgdt" which required the 48-bit memory operand, -in long mode require the 80-bit memory operand. - The "cmpxchg16b" is the 64-bit equivalent of "cmpxchg8b" instruction, it uses -the double quad word memory operand and 64-bit registers to perform the -analoguous operation. - The "fxsave64" and "fxrstor64" are new variants of "fxsave" and "fxrstor" -instructions, available only in long mode, which use a different format of -storage area in order to store some pointers in full 64-bit size. - "swapgs" is the new instruction, which swaps the contents of GS register and -the KernelGSbase model-specific register (MSR address 0C0000102h). - "syscall" and "sysret" is the pair of new instructions that provide the -functionality similar to "sysenter" and "sysexit" in long mode, where the -latter pair is disallowed. The "sysexitq" and "sysretq" mnemonics provide the -64-bit versions of "sysexit" and "sysret" instructions. - The "rdmsrq" and "wrmsrq" mnemonics are the 64-bit variants of the "rdmsr" -and "wrmsr" instructions. - - -2.1.20 SSE4 instructions - -There are actually three different sets of instructions under the name SSE4. -Intel designed two of them, SSE4.1 and SSE4.2, with latter extending the -former into the full Intel's SSE4 set. On the other hand, the implementation -by AMD includes only a few instructions from this set, but also contains -some additional instructions, that are called the SSE4a set. - The SSE4.1 instructions mostly follow the same rules for operands, as -the basic SSE operations, so they require destination operand to be SSE -register and source operand to be 128-bit memory location or SSE register, -and some operations require a third operand, the 8-bit immediate value. - "pmulld" performs a signed multiplication of the packed double words and -stores the low double words of the results in the destination operand. -"pmuldq" performs a two signed multiplications of the corresponding double -words in the lower quad words of operands, and stores the results as -packed quad words into the destination register. "pminsb" and "pmaxsb" -return the minimum or maximum values of packed signed bytes, "pminuw" and -"pmaxuw" return the minimum and maximum values of packed unsigned words, -"pminud", "pmaxud", "pminsd" and "pmaxsd" return minimum or maximum values -of packed unsigned or signed words. These instruction complement the -instructions computing packed minimum or maximum introduced by SSE. - "ptest" sets the ZF flag to one when the result of bitwise AND of the -both operands is zero, and zeroes the ZF otherwise. It also sets CF flag -to one, when the result of bitwise AND of the destination operand with -the bitwise NOT of the source operand is zero, and zeroes the CF otherwise. -"pcmpeqq" compares packed quad words for equality, and fills the -corresponding elements of destination operand with either ones or zeros, -depending on the result of comparison. - "packusdw" converts packed signed double words from both the source and -destination operand into the unsigned words using saturation, and stores -the eight resulting word values into the destination register. - "phminposuw" finds the minimum unsigned word value in source operand and -places it into the lowest word of destination operand, setting the remaining -upper bits of destination to zero. - "roundps", "roundss", "roundpd" and "roundsd" perform the rounding of packed -or individual floating point value of single or double precision, using the -rounding mode specified by the third operand. - - roundsd xmm0,xmm1,0011b ; round toward zero - - "dpps" calculates dot product of packed single precision floating point -values, that is it multiplies the corresponding pairs of values from source and -destination operand and then sums the products up. The high four bits of the -8-bit immediate third operand control which products are calculated and taken -to the sum, and the low four bits control, into which elements of destination -the resulting dot product is copied (the other elements are filled with zero). -"dppd" calculates dot product of packed double precision floating point values. -The bits 4 and 5 of third operand control, which products are calculated and -added, and bits 0 and 1 of this value control, which elements in destination -register should get filled with the result. "mpsadbw" calculates multiple sums -of absolute differences of unsigned bytes. The third operand controls, with -value in bits 0-1, which of the four-byte blocks in source operand is taken to -calculate the absolute differencies, and with value in bit 2, at which of the -two first four-byte block in destination operand start calculating multiple -sums. The sum is calculated from four absolute differencies between the -corresponding unsigned bytes in the source and destination block, and each next -sum is calculated in the same way, but taking the four bytes from destination -at the position one byte after the position of previous block. The four bytes -from the source stay the same each time. This way eight sums of absolute -differencies are calculated and stored as packed word values into the -destination operand. The instructions described in this paragraph follow the -same rules for operands, as "roundps" instruction. - "blendps", "blendvps", "blendpd" and "blendvpd" conditionally copy the -values from source operand into the destination operand, depending on the bits -of the mask provided by third operand. If a mask bit is set, the corresponding -element of source is copied into the same place in destination, otherwise this -position is destination is left unchanged. The rules for the first two operands -are the same, as for general SSE instructions. "blendps" and "blendpd" need -third operand to be 8-bit immediate, and they operate on single or double -precision values, respectively. "blendvps" and "blendvpd" require third operand -to be the XMM0 register. - - blendvps xmm3,xmm7,xmm0 ; blend according to mask - - "pblendw" conditionally copies word elements from the source operand into the -destination, depending on the bits of mask provided by third operand, which -needs to be 8-bit immediate value. "pblendvb" conditionally copies byte -elements from the source operands into destination, depending on mask defined -by the third operand, which has to be XMM0 register. These instructions follow -the same rules for operands as "blendps" and "blendvps" instructions, -respectively. - "insertps" inserts a single precision floating point value taken from the -position in source operand specified by bits 6-7 of third operand into location -in destination register selected by bits 4-5 of third operand. Additionally, -the low four bits of third operand control, which elements in destination -register will be set to zero. The first two operands follow the same rules as -for the general SSE operation, the third operand should be 8-bit immediate. - "extractps" extracts a single precision floating point value taken from the -location in source operand specified by low two bits of third operand, and -stores it into the destination operand. The destination can be a 32-bit memory -value or general purpose register, the source operand must be SSE register, -and the third operand should be 8-bit immediate value. - - extractps edx,xmm3,3 ; extract the highest value - - "pinsrb", "pinsrd" and "pinsrq" copy a byte, double word or quad word from -the source operand into the location of destination operand determined by the -third operand. The destination operand has to be SSE register, the source -operand can be a memory location of appropriate size, or the 32-bit general -purpose register (but 64-bit general purpose register for "pinsrq", which is -only available in long mode), and the third operand has to be 8-bit immediate -value. These instructions complement the "pinsrw" instruction operating on SSE -register destination, which was introduced by SSE2. - - pinsrd xmm4,eax,1 ; insert double word into second position - - "pextrb", "pextrw", "pextrd" and "pextrq" copy a byte, word, double word or -quad word from the location in source operand specified by third operand, into -the destination. The source operand should be SSE register, the third operand -should be 8-bit immediate, and the destination operand can be memory location -of appropriate size, or the 32-bit general purpose register (but 64-bit general -purpose register for "pextrq", which is only available in long mode). The -"pextrw" instruction with SSE register as source was already introduced by -SSE2, but SSE4 extends it to allow memory operand as destination. - - pextrw [ebx],xmm3,7 ; extract highest word into memory - - "pmovsxbw" and "pmovzxbw" perform sign extension or zero extension of eight -byte values from the source operand into packed word values in destination -operand, which has to be SSE register. The source can be 64-bit memory or SSE -register - when it is register, only its low portion is used. "pmovsxbd" and -"pmovzxbd" perform sign extension or zero extension of the four byte values -from the source operand into packed double word values in destination operand, -the source can be 32-bit memory or SSE register. "pmovsxbq" and "pmovzxbq" -perform sign extension or zero extension of the two byte values from the -source operand into packed quad word values in destination operand, the source -can be 16-bit memory or SSE register. "pmovsxwd" and "pmovzxwd" perform sign -extension or zero extension of the four word values from the source operand -into packed double words in destination operand, the source can be 64-bit -memory or SSE register. "pmovsxwq" and "pmovzxwq" perform sign extension or -zero extension of the two word values from the source operand into packed quad -words in destination operand, the source can be 32-bit memory or SSE register. -"pmovsxdq" and "pmovzxdq" perform sign extension or zero extension of the two -double word values from the source operand into packed quad words in -destination operand, the source can be 64-bit memory or SSE register. - - pmovzxbq xmm0,word [si] ; zero-extend bytes to quad words - pmovsxwq xmm0,xmm1 ; sign-extend words to quad words - - "movntdqa" loads double quad word from the source operand to the destination -using a non-temporal hint. The destination operand should be SSE register, -and the source operand should be 128-bit memory location. - The SSE4.2, described below, adds not only some new operations on SSE -registers, but also introduces some completely new instructions operating on -general purpose registers only. - "pcmpistri" compares two zero-ended (implicit length) strings provided in -its source and destination operand and generates an index stored to ECX; -"pcmpistrm" performs the same comparison and generates a mask stored to XMM0. -"pcmpestri" compares two strings of explicit lengths, with length provided -in EAX for the destination operand and in EDX for the source operand, and -generates an index stored to ECX; "pcmpestrm" performs the same comparision -and generates a mask stored to XMM0. The source and destination operand follow -the same rules as for general SSE instructions, the third operand should be -8-bit immediate value determining the details of performed operation - refer to -Intel documentation for information on those details. - "pcmpgtq" compares packed quad words, and fills the corresponding elements of -destination operand with either ones or zeros, depending on whether the value -in destination is greater than the one in source, or not. This instruction -follows the same rules for operands as "pcmpeqq". - "crc32" accumulates a CRC32 value for the source operand starting with -initial value provided by destination operand, and stores the result in -destination. Unless in long mode, the destination operand should be a 32-bit -general purpose register, and the source operand can be a byte, word, or double -word register or memory location. In long mode the destination operand can -also be a 64-bit general purpose register, and the source operand in such case -can be a byte or quad word register or memory location. - - crc32 eax,dl ; accumulate CRC32 on byte value - crc32 eax,word [ebx] ; accumulate CRC32 on word value - crc32 rax,qword [rbx] ; accumulate CRC32 on quad word value - - "popcnt" calculates the number of bits set in the source operand, which can -be 16-bit, 32-bit, or 64-bit general purpose register or memory location, -and stores this count in the destination operand, which has to be register of -the same size as source operand. The 64-bit variant is available only in long -mode. - - popcnt ecx,eax ; count bits set to 1 - - The SSE4a extension, which also includes the "popcnt" instruction introduced -by SSE4.2, at the same time adds the "lzcnt" instruction, which follows the -same syntax, and calculates the count of leading zero bits in source operand -(if the source operand is all zero bits, the total number of bits in source -operand is stored in destination). - "extrq" extract the sequence of bits from the low quad word of SSE register -provided as first operand and stores them at the low end of this register, -filling the remaining bits in the low quad word with zeros. The position of bit -string and its length can either be provided with two 8-bit immediate values -as second and third operand, or by SSE register as second operand (and there -is no third operand in such case), which should contain position value in bits -8-13 and length of bit string in bits 0-5. - - extrq xmm0,8,7 ; extract 8 bits from position 7 - extrq xmm0,xmm5 ; extract bits defined by register - - "insertq" writes the sequence of bits from the low quad word of the source -operand into specified position in low quad word of the destination operand, -leaving the other bits in low quad word of destination intact. The position -where bits should be written and the length of bit string can either be -provided with two 8-bit immediate values as third and fourth operand, or by -the bit fields in source operand (and there are only two operands in such -case), which should contain position value in bits 72-77 and length of bit -string in bits 64-69. - - insertq xmm1,xmm0,4,2 ; insert 4 bits at position 2 - insertq xmm1,xmm0 ; insert bits defined by register - - "movntss" and "movntsd" store single or double precision floating point -value from the source SSE register into 32-bit or 64-bit destination memory -location respectively, using non-temporal hint. - - -2.1.21 AVX instructions - -The Advanced Vector Extensions introduce instructions that are new variants -of SSE instructions, with new scheme of encoding that allows extended syntax -having a destination operand separate from all the source operands. It also -introduces 256-bit AVX registers, which extend up the old 128-bit SSE -registers. Any AVX instruction that puts some result into SSE register, puts -zero bits into high portion of the AVX register containing it. - The AVX version of SSE instruction has the mnemonic obtained by prepending -SSE instruction name with "v". For any SSE arithmetic instruction which had a -destination operand also being used as one of the source values, the AVX -variant has a new syntax with three operands - the destination and two sources. -The destination and first source can be SSE registers, and second source can be -SSE register or memory. If the operation is performed on single pair of values, -the remaining bits of first source SSE register are copied into the the -destination register. - - vsubss xmm0,xmm2,xmm3 ; substract two 32-bit floats - vmulsd xmm0,xmm7,qword [esi] ; multiply two 64-bit floats - -In case of packed operations, each instruction can also operate on the 256-bit -data size when the AVX registers are specified instead of SSE registers, and -the size of memory operand is also doubled then. - - vaddps ymm1,ymm5,yword [esi] ; eight sums of 32-bit float pairs - -The instructions that operate on packed integer types (in particular the ones -that earlier had been promoted from MMX to SSE) also acquired the new syntax -with three operands, however they are only allowed to operate on 128-bit -packed types and thus cannot use the whole AVX registers. - - vpavgw xmm3,xmm0,xmm2 ; average of 16-bit integers - vpslld xmm1,xmm0,1 ; shift double words left - -If the SSE version of instruction had a syntax with three operands, the third -one being an immediate value, the AVX version of such instruction takes four -operands, with immediate remaining the last one. - - vshufpd ymm0,ymm1,ymm2,10010011b ; shuffle 64-bit floats - vpalignr xmm0,xmm4,xmm2,3 ; extract byte aligned value - -The promotion to new syntax according to the rules described above has been -applied to all the instructions from SSE extensions up to SSE4, with the -exceptions described below. - "vdppd" instruction has syntax extended to four operans, but it does not -have a 256-bit version. - The are a few instructions, namely "vsqrtpd", "vsqrtps", "vrcpps" and -"vrsqrtps", which can operate on 256-bit data size, but retained the syntax -with only two operands, because they use data from only one source: - - vsqrtpd ymm1,ymm0 ; put square roots into other register - -In a similar way "vroundpd" and "vroundps" retained the syntax with three -operands, the last one being immediate value. - - vroundps ymm0,ymm1,0011b ; round toward zero - - Also some of the operations on packed integers kept their two-operand or -three-operand syntax while being promoted to AVX version. In such case these -instructions follow exactly the same rules for operands as their SSE -counterparts (since operations on packed integers do not have 256-bit variants -in AVX extension). These include "vpcmpestri", "vpcmpestrm", "vpcmpistri", -"vpcmpistrm", "vphminposuw", "vpshufd", "vpshufhw", "vpshuflw". And there are -more instructions that in AVX versions keep exactly the same syntax for -operands as the one from SSE, without any additional options: "vcomiss", -"vcomisd", "vcvtss2si", "vcvtsd2si", "vcvttss2si", "vcvttsd2si", "vextractps", -"vpextrb", "vpextrw", "vpextrd", "vpextrq", "vmovd", "vmovq", "vmovntdqa", -"vmaskmovdqu", "vpmovmskb", "vpmovsxbw", "vpmovsxbd", "vpmovsxbq", "vpmovsxwd", -"vpmovsxwq", "vpmovsxdq", "vpmovzxbw", "vpmovzxbd", "vpmovzxbq", "vpmovzxwd", -"vpmovzxwq" and "vpmovzxdq". - The move and conversion instructions have mostly been promoted to allow -256-bit size operands in addition to the 128-bit variant with syntax identical -to that from SSE version of the same instruction. Each of the "vcvtdq2ps", -"vcvtps2dq" and "vcvttps2dq", "vmovaps", "vmovapd", "vmovups", "vmovupd", -"vmovdqa", "vmovdqu", "vlddqu", "vmovntps", "vmovntpd", "vmovntdq", -"vmovsldup", "vmovshdup", "vmovmskps" and "vmovmskpd" inherits the 128-bit -syntax from SSE without any changes, and also allows a new form with 256-bit -operands in place of 128-bit ones. - - vmovups [edi],ymm6 ; store unaligned 256-bit data - - "vmovddup" has the identical 128-bit syntax as its SSE version, and it also -has a 256-bit version, which stores the duplicates of the lowest quad word -from the source operand in the lower half of destination operand, and in the -upper half of destination the duplicates of the low quad word from the upper -half of source. Both source and destination operands need then to be 256-bit -values. - "vmovlhps" and "vmovhlps" have only 128-bit versions, and each takes three -operands, which all must be SSE registers. "vmovlhps" copies two single -precision values from the low quad word of second source register to the high -quad word of destination register, and copies the low quad word of first -source register into the low quad word of destination register. "vmovhlps" -copies two single precision values from the high quad word of second source -register to the low quad word of destination register, and copies the high -quad word of first source register into the high quad word of destination -register. - "vmovlps", "vmovhps", "vmovlpd" and "vmovhpd" have only 128-bit versions and -their syntax varies depending on whether memory operand is a destination or -source. When memory is destination, the syntax is identical to the one of -equivalent SSE instruction, and when memory is source, the instruction requires -three operands, first two being SSE registers and the third one 64-bit memory. -The value put into destination is then the value copied from first source with -either low or high quad word replaced with value from second source (the -memory operand). - - vmovhps [esi],xmm7 ; store upper half to memory - vmovlps xmm0,xmm7,[ebx] ; low from memory, rest from register - - "vmovss" and "vmovsd" have syntax identical to their SSE equivalents as long -as one of the operands is memory, while the versions that operate purely on -registers require three operands (each being SSE register). The value stored -in destination is then the value copied from first source with lowest data -element replaced with the lowest value from second source. - - vmovss xmm3,[edi] ; low from memory, rest zeroed - vmovss xmm0,xmm1,xmm2 ; one value from xmm2, three from xmm1 - - "vcvtss2sd", "vcvtsd2ss", "vcvtsi2ss" and "vcvtsi2d" use the three-operand -syntax, where destination and first source are always SSE registers, and the -second source follows the same rules and the source in syntax of equivalent -SSE instruction. The value stored in destination is then the value copied from -first source with lowest data element replaced with the result of conversion. - - vcvtsi2sd xmm4,xmm4,ecx ; 32-bit integer to 64-bit float - vcvtsi2ss xmm0,xmm0,rax ; 64-bit integer to 32-bit float - - "vcvtdq2pd" and "vcvtps2pd" allow the same syntax as their SSE equivalents, -plus the new variants with AVX register as destination and SSE register or -128-bit memory as source. Analogously "vcvtpd2dq", "vcvttpd2dq" and -"vcvtpd2ps", in addition to variant with syntax identical to SSE version, -allow a variant with SSE register as destination and AVX register or 256-bit -memory as source. - "vinsertps", "vpinsrb", "vpinsrw", "vpinsrd", "vpinsrq" and "vpblendw" use -a syntax with four operands, where destination and first source have to be SSE -registers, and the third and fourth operand follow the same rules as second -and third operand in the syntax of equivalent SSE instruction. Value stored in -destination is the the value copied from first source with some data elements -replaced with values extracted from the second source, analogously to the -operation of corresponding SSE instruction. - - vpinsrd xmm0,xmm0,eax,3 ; insert double word - - "vblendvps", "vblendvpd" and "vpblendvb" use a new syntax with four register -operands: destination, two sources and a mask, where second source can also be -a memory operand. "vblendvps" and "vblendvpd" have 256-bit variant, where -operands are AVX registers or 256-bit memory, as well as 128-bit variant, -which has operands being SSE registers or 128-bit memory. "vpblendvb" has only -a 128-bit variant. Value stored in destination is the value copied from the -first source with some data elements replaced, according to mask, by values -from the second source. - - vblendvps ymm3,ymm1,ymm2,ymm7 ; blend according to mask - - "vptest" allows the same syntax as its SSE version and also has a 256-bit -version, with both operands doubled in size. There are also two new -instructions, "vtestps" and "vtestpd", which perform analogous tests, but only -of the sign bits of corresponding single precision or double precision values, -and set the ZF and CF accordingly. They follow the same syntax rules as -"vptest". - - vptest ymm0,yword [ebx] ; test 256-bit values - vtestpd xmm0,xmm1 ; test sign bits of 64-bit floats - - "vbroadcastss", "vbroadcastsd" and "vbroadcastf128" are new instructions, -which broadcast the data element defined by source operand into all elements -of corresponing size in the destination register. "vbroadcastss" needs -source to be 32-bit memory and destination to be either SSE or AVX register. -"vbroadcastsd" requires 64-bit memory as source, and AVX register as -destination. "vbroadcastf128" requires 128-bit memory as source, and AVX -register as destination. - - vbroadcastss ymm0,dword [eax] ; get eight copies of value - - "vinsertf128" is the new instruction, which takes four operands. The -destination and first source have to be AVX registers, second source can be -SSE register or 128-bit memory location, and fourth operand should be an -immediate value. It stores in destination the value obtained by taking -contents of first source and replacing one of its 128-bit units with value of -the second source. The lowest bit of fourth operand specifies at which -position that replacement is done (either 0 or 1). - "vextractf128" is the new instruction with three operands. The destination -needs to be SSE register or 128-bit memory location, the source must be AVX -register, and the third operand should be an immediate value. It extracts -into destination one of the 128-bit units from source. The lowest bit of third -operand specifies, which unit is extracted. - "vmaskmovps" and "vmaskmovpd" are the new instructions with three operands -that selectively store in destination the elements from second source -depending on the sign bits of corresponding elements from first source. These -instructions can operate on either 128-bit data (SSE registers) or 256-bit -data (AVX registers). Either destination or second source has to be a memory -location of appropriate size, the two other operands should be registers. - - vmaskmovps [edi],xmm0,xmm5 ; conditionally store - vmaskmovpd ymm5,ymm0,[esi] ; conditionally load - - "vpermilpd" and "vpermilps" are the new instructions with three operands -that permute the values from first source according to the control fields from -second source and put the result into destination operand. It allows to use -either three SSE registers or three AVX registers as its operands, the second -source can be a memory of size equal to the registers used. In alternative -form the second source can be immediate value and then the first source -can be a memory location of the size equal to destination register. - "vperm2f128" is the new instruction with four operands, which selects -128-bit blocks of floating point data from first and second source according -to the bit fields from fourth operand, and stores them in destination. -Destination and first source need to be AVX registers, second source can be -AVX register or 256-bit memory area, and fourth operand should be an immediate -value. - - vperm2f128 ymm0,ymm6,ymm7,12h ; permute 128-bit blocks - - "vzeroall" instruction sets all the AVX registers to zero. "vzeroupper" sets -the upper 128-bit portions of all AVX registers to zero, leaving the SSE -registers intact. These new instructions take no operands. - "vldmxcsr" and "vstmxcsr" are the AVX versions of "ldmxcsr" and "stmxcsr" -instructions. The rules for their operands remain unchanged. - - -2.1.22 AVX2 instructions - -The AVX2 extension allows all the AVX instructions operating on packed integers -to use 256-bit data types, and introduces some new instructions as well. - The AVX instructions that operate on packed integers and had only a 128-bit -variants, have been supplemented with 256-bit variants, and thus their syntax -rules became analogous to AVX instructions operating on packed floating point -types. - - vpsubb ymm0,ymm0,[esi] ; substract 32 packed bytes - vpavgw ymm3,ymm0,ymm2 ; average of 16-bit integers - -However there are some instructions that have not been equipped with the -256-bit variants. "vpcmpestri", "vpcmpestrm", "vpcmpistri", "vpcmpistrm", -"vpextrb", "vpextrw", "vpextrd", "vpextrq", "vpinsrb", "vpinsrw", "vpinsrd", -"vpinsrq" and "vphminposuw" are not affected by AVX2 and allow only the -128-bit operands. - The packed shift instructions, which allowed the third operand specifying -amount to be SSE register or 128-bit memory location, use the same rules -for the third operand in their 256-bit variant. - - vpsllw ymm2,ymm2,xmm4 ; shift words left - vpsrad ymm0,ymm3,xword [ebx] ; shift double words right - - There are also new packed shift instructions with standard three-operand AVX -syntax, which shift each element from first source by the amount specified in -corresponding element of second source, and store the results in destination. -"vpsllvd" shifts 32-bit elements left, "vpsllvq" shifts 64-bit elements left, -"vpsrlvd" shifts 32-bit elements right logically, "vpsrlvq" shifts 64-bit -elements right logically and "vpsravd" shifts 32-bit elements right -arithmetically. - The sign-extend and zero-extend instructions, which in AVX versions allowed -source operand to be SSE register or a memory of specific size, in the new -256-bit variant need memory of that size doubled or SSE register as source and -AVX register as destination. - - vpmovzxbq ymm0,dword [esi] ; bytes to quad words - - Also "vmovntdqa" has been upgraded with 256-bit variant, so it allows to -transfer 256-bit value from memory to AVX register, it needs memory address -to be aligned to 32 bytes. - "vpmaskmovd" and "vpmaskmovq" are the new instructions with syntax identical -to "vmaskmovps" or "vmaskmovpd", and they performs analogous operation on -packed 32-bit or 64-bit values. - "vinserti128", "vextracti128", "vbroadcasti128" and "vperm2i128" are the new -instructions with syntax identical to "vinsertf128", "vextractf128", -"vbroadcastf128" and "vperm2f128" respectively, and they perform analogous -operations on 128-bit blocks of integer data. - "vbroadcastss" and "vbroadcastsd" instructions have been extended to allow -SSE register as a source operand (which in AVX could only be a memory). - "vpbroadcastb", "vpbroadcastw", "vpbroadcastd" and "vpbroadcastq" are the -new instructions which broadcast the byte, word, double word or quad word from -the source operand into all elements of corresponing size in the destination -register. The destination operand can be either SSE or AVX register, and the -source operand can be SSE register or memory of size equal to the size of data -element. - - vpbroadcastb ymm0,byte [ebx] ; get 32 identical bytes - - "vpermd" and "vpermps" are new three-operand instructions, which use each -32-bit element from first source as an index of element in second source which -is copied into destination at position corresponding to element containing -index. The destination and first source have to be AVX registers, and the -second source can be AVX register or 256-bit memory. - "vpermq" and "vpermpd" are new three-operand instructions, which use 2-bit -indexes from the immediate value specified as third operand to determine which -element from source store at given position in destination. The destination -has to be AVX register, source can be AVX register or 256-bit memory, and the -third operand must be 8-bit immediate value. - The family of new instructions performing "gather" operation have special -syntax, as in their memory operand they use addressing mode that is unique to -them. The base of address can be a 32-bit or 64-bit general purpose register -(the latter only in long mode), and the index (possibly multiplied by scale -value, as in standard addressing) is specified by SSE or AVX register. It is -possible to use only index without base and any numerical displacement can be -added to the address. Each of those instructions takes three operands. First -operand is the destination register, second operand is memory addressed with -a vector index, and third operand is register containing a mask. The most -significant bit of each element of mask determines whether a value will be -loaded from memory into corresponding element in destination. The address of -each element to load is determined by using the corresponding element from -index register in memory operand to calculate final address with given base -and displacement. When the index register contains less elements than the -destination and mask registers, the higher elements of destination are zeroed. -After the value is successfuly loaded, the corresponding element in mask -register is set to zero. The destination, index and mask should all be -distinct registers, it is not allowed to use the same register in two -different roles. - "vgatherdps" loads single precision floating point values addressed by -32-bit indexes. The destination, index and mask should all be registers of the -same type, either SSE or AVX. The data addressed by memory operand is 32-bit -in size. - - vgatherdps xmm0,[eax+xmm1],xmm3 ; gather four floats - vgatherdps ymm0,[ebx+ymm7*4],ymm3 ; gather eight floats - - "vgatherqps" loads single precision floating point values addressed by -64-bit indexes. The destination and mask should always be SSE registers, while -index register can be either SSE or AVX register. The data addressed by memory -operand is 32-bit in size. - - vgatherqps xmm0,[xmm2],xmm3 ; gather two floats - vgatherqps xmm0,[ymm2+64],xmm3 ; gather four floats - - "vgatherdpd" loads double precision floating point values addressed by -32-bit indexes. The index register should always be SSE register, the -destination and mask should be two registers of the same type, either SSE or -AVX. The data addressed by memory operand is 64-bit in size. - - vgatherdpd xmm0,[ebp+xmm1],xmm3 ; gather two doubles - vgatherdpd ymm0,[xmm3*8],ymm5 ; gather four doubles - - "vgatherqpd" loads double precision floating point values addressed by -64-bit indexes. The destination, index and mask should all be registers of the -same type, either SSE or AVX. The data addressed by memory operand is 64-bit -in size. - "vpgatherdd" and "vpgatherqd" load 32-bit values addressed by either 32-bit -or 64-bit indexes. They follow the same rules as "vgatherdps" and "vgatherqps" -respectively. - "vpgatherdq" and "vpgatherqq" load 64-bit values addressed by either 32-bit -or 64-bit indexes. They follow the same rules as "vgatherdpd" and "vgatherqpd" -respectively. - - -2.1.23 Auxiliary sets of computational instructions - - There is a number of additional instruction set extensions related to -AVX. They introduce new vector instructions (and sometimes also their SSE -equivalents that use classic instruction encoding), and even some new -instructions operating on general registers that use the AVX-like encoding -allowing the extended syntax with separate destination and source operands. -The CPU support for each of these instruction sets needs to be determined -separately. - The AES extension provides a specialized set of instructions for the -purpose of cryptographic computations defined by Advanced Encryption Standard. -Each of these instructions has two versions: the AVX one and the one with -SSE-like syntax that uses classic encoding. Refer to the Intel manuals for the -details of operation of these instructions. - "aesenc" and "aesenclast" perform a single round of AES encryption on data -from first source with a round key from second source, and store result in -destination. The destination and first source are SSE registers, and the -second source can be SSE register or 128-bit memory. The AVX versions of these -instructions, "vaesenc" and "vaesenclast", use the syntax with three operands, -while the SSE-like version has only two operands, with first operand being -both the destination and first source. - "aesdec" and "aesdeclast" perform a single round of AES decryption on data -from first source with a round key from second source. The syntax rules for -them and their AVX versions are the same as for "aesenc". - "aesimc" performs the InvMixColumns transformation of source operand and -store the result in destination. Both "aesimc" and "vaesimc" use only two -operands, destination being SSE register, and source being SSE register or -128-bit memory location. - "aeskeygenassist" is a helper instruction for generating the round key. -It needs three operands: destination being SSE register, source being SSE -register or 128-bit memory, and third operand being 8-bit immediate value. -The AVX version of this instruction uses the same syntax. - The CLMUL extension introduces just one instruction, "pclmulqdq", and its -AVX version as well. This instruction performs a carryless multiplication of -two 64-bit values selected from first and second source according to the bit -fields in immediate value. The destination and first source are SSE registers, -second source is SSE register or 128-bit memory, and immediate value is -provided as last operand. "vpclmulqdq" takes four operands, while "pclmulqdq" -takes only three operands, with the first one serving both the role of -destination and first source. - The FMA (Fused Multiply-Add) extension introduces additional AVX -instructions which perform multiplication and summation as single operation. -Each one takes three operands, first one serving both the role of destination -and first source, and the following ones being the second and third source. -The mnemonic of FMA instruction is obtained by appending to "vf" prefix: first -either "m" or "nm" to select whether result of multiplication should be taken -as-is or negated, then either "add" or "sub" to select whether third value -will be added to the product or substracted from the product, then either -"132", "213" or "231" to select which source operands are multiplied and which -one is added or substracted, and finally the type of data on which the -instruction operates, either "ps", "pd", "ss" or "sd". As it was with SSE -instructions promoted to AVX, instructions operating on packed floating point -values allow 128-bit or 256-bit syntax, in former all the operands are SSE -registers, but the third one can also be a 128-bit memory, in latter the -operands are AVX registers and the third one can also be a 256-bit memory. -Instructions that compute just one floating point result need operands to be -SSE registers, and the third operand can also be a memory, either 32-bit for -single precision or 64-bit for double precision. - - vfmsub231ps ymm1,ymm2,ymm3 ; multiply and substract - vfnmadd132sd xmm0,xmm5,[ebx] ; multiply, negate and add - -In addition to the instructions created by the rule described above, there are -families of instructions with mnemonics starting with either "vfmaddsub" or -"vfmsubadd", followed by either "132", "213" or "231" and then either "ps" or -"pd" (the operation must always be on packed values in this case). They add -to the result of multiplication or substract from it depending on the position -of value in packed data - instructions from the "vfmaddsub" group add when the -position is odd and substract when the position is even, instructions from the -"vfmsubadd" group add when the position is even and subtstract when the -position is odd. The rules for operands are the same as for other FMA -instructions. - The FMA4 instructions are similar to FMA, but use syntax with four operands -and thus allow destination to be different than all the sources. Their -mnemonics are identical to FMA instructions with the "132", "213" or "231" cut -out, as having separate destination operand makes such selection of operands -superfluous. The multiplication is always performed on values from the first -and second source, and then the value from third source is added or -substracted. Either second or third source can be a memory operand, and the -rules for the sizes of operands are the same as for FMA instructions. - - vfmaddpd ymm0,ymm1,[esi],ymm2 ; multiply and add - vfmsubss xmm0,xmm1,xmm2,[ebx] ; multiply and substract - - The F16C extension consists of two instructions, "vcvtps2ph" and -"vcvtph2ps", which convert floating point values between single precision and -half precision (the 16-bit floating point format). "vcvtps2ph" takes three -operands: destination, source, and rounding controls. The third operand is -always an immediate, the source is either SSE or AVX register containing -single precision values, and the destination is SSE register or memory, the -size of memory is 64 bits when the source is SSE register and 128 bits when -the source is AVX register. "vcvtph2ps" takes two operands, the destination -that can be SSE or AVX register, and the source that is SSE register or memory -with size of the half of destination operand's size. - The AMD XOP extension introduces a number of new vector instructions with -encoding and syntax analogous to AVX instructions. "vfrczps", "vfrczss", -"vfrczpd" and "vfrczsd" extract fractional portions of single or double -precision values, they all take two operands. The packed operations allow -either SSE or AVX register as destination, for the other two it has to be SSE -register. Source can be register of the same type as destination, or memory -of appropriate size (256-bit for destination being AVX register, 128-bit for -packed operation with destination being SSE register, 64-bit for operation -on a solitary double precision value and 32-bit for operation on a solitary -single precision value). - - vfrczps ymm0,[esi] ; load fractional parts - - "vpcmov" copies bits from either first or second source into destination -depending on the values of corresponding bits in the fourth operand (the -selector). If the bit in selector is set, the corresponding bit from first -source is copied into the same position in destination, otherwise the bit from -second source is copied. Either second source or selector can be memory -location, 128-bit or 256-bit depending on whether SSE registers or AVX -registers are specified as the other operands. - - vpcmov xmm0,xmm1,xmm2,[ebx] ; selector in memory - vpcmov ymm0,ymm5,[esi],ymm2 ; source in memory - -The family of packed comparison instructions take four operands, the -destination and first source being SSE register, second source being SSE -register or 128-bit memory and the fourth operand being immediate value -defining the type of comparison. The mnemonic or instruction is created -by appending to "vpcom" prefix either "b" or "ub" to compare signed or -unsigned bytes, "w" or "uw" to compare signed or unsigned words, "d" or "ud" -to compare signed or unsigned double words, "q" or "uq" to compare signed or -unsigned quad words. The respective values from the first and second source -are compared and the corresponding data element in destination is set to -either all ones or all zeros depending on the result of comparison. The fourth -operand has to specify one of the eight comparison types (table 2.5). All -these instruction have also variants with only three operands and the type -of comparison encoded within the instruction name by inserting the comparison -mnemonic after "vpcom". - - vpcomb xmm0,xmm1,xmm2,4 ; test for equal bytes - vpcomgew xmm0,xmm1,[ebx] ; compare signed words - - Table 2.5 XOP comparisons - /-------------------------------------------\ - | Code | Mnemonic | Description | - |======|==========|=========================| - | 0 | lt | less than | - | 1 | le | less than or equal | - | 2 | gt | greater than | - | 3 | ge | greater than or equal | - | 4 | eq | equal | - | 5 | neq | not equal | - | 6 | false | false | - | 7 | true | true | - \-------------------------------------------/ - - "vpermil2ps" and "vpermil2pd" set the elements in destination register to -zero or to a value selected from first or second source depending on the -corresponding bit fields from the fourth operand (the selector) and the -immediate value provided in fifth operand. Refer to the AMD manuals for the -detailed explanation of the operation performed by these instructions. Each -of the first four operands can be a register, and either second source or -selector can be memory location, 128-bit or 256-bit depending on whether SSE -registers or AVX registers are used for the other operands. - - vpermil2ps ymm0,ymm3,ymm7,ymm2,0 ; permute from two sources - - "vphaddbw" adds pairs of adjacent signed bytes to form 16-bit values and -stores them at the same positions in destination. "vphaddubw" does the same -but treats the bytes as unsigned. "vphaddbd" and "vphaddubd" sum all bytes -(either signed or unsigned) in each four-byte block to 32-bit results, -"vphaddbq" and "vphaddubq" sum all bytes in each eight-byte block to -64-bit results, "vphaddwd" and "vphadduwd" add pairs of words to 32-bit -results, "vphaddwq" and "vphadduwq" sum all words in each four-word block to -64-bit results, "vphadddq" and "vphaddudq" add pairs of double words to 64-bit -results. "vphsubbw" substracts in each two-byte block the byte at higher -position from the one at lower position, and stores the result as a signed -16-bit value at the corresponding position in destination, "vphsubwd" -substracts in each two-word block the word at higher position from the one at -lower position and makes signed 32-bit results, "vphsubdq" substract in each -block of two double word the one at higher position from the one at lower -position and makes signed 64-bit results. Each of these instructions takes -two operands, the destination being SSE register, and the source being SSE -register or 128-bit memory. - - vphadduwq xmm0,xmm1 ; sum quadruplets of words - - "vpmacsww" and "vpmacssww" multiply the corresponding signed 16-bit values -from the first and second source and then add the products to the parallel -values from the third source, then "vpmacsww" takes the lowest 16 bits of the -result and "vpmacssww" saturates the result down to 16-bit value, and they -store the final 16-bit results in the destination. "vpmacsdd" and "vpmacssdd" -perform the analogous operation on 32-bit values. "vpmacswd" and "vpmacswd" do -the same calculation only on the low 16-bit values from each 32-bit block and -form the 32-bit results. "vpmacsdql" and "vpmacssdql" perform such operation -on the low 32-bit values from each 64-bit block and form the 64-bit results, -while "vpmacsdqh" and "vpmacssdqh" do the same on the high 32-bit values from -each 64-bit block, also forming the 64-bit results. "vpmadcswd" and -"vpmadcsswd" multiply the corresponding signed 16-bit value from the first -and second source, then sum all the four products and add this sum to each -16-bit element from third source, storing the truncated or saturated result -in destination. All these instructions take four operands, the second source -can be 128-bit memory or SSE register, all the other operands have to be -SSE registers. - - vpmacsdd xmm6,xmm1,[ebx],xmm6 ; accumulate product - - "vpperm" selects bytes from first and second source, optionally applies a -separate transformation to each of them, and stores them in the destination. -The bit fields in fourth operand (the selector) specify for each position in -destination what byte from which source is taken and what operation is applied -to it before it is stored there. Refer to the AMD manuals for the detailed -information about these bit fields. This instruction takes four operands, -either second source or selector can be a 128-bit memory (or they can be SSE -registers both), all the other operands have to be SSE registers. - "vpshlb", "vpshlw", "vpshld" and "vpshlq" shift logically bytes, words, double -words or quad words respectively. The amount of bits to shift by is specified -for each element separately by the signed byte placed at the corresponding -position in the third operand. The source containing elements to shift is -provided as second operand. Either second or third operand can be 128-bit -memory (or they can be SSE registers both) and the other operands have to be -SSE registers. - - vpshld xmm3,xmm1,[ebx] ; shift bytes from xmm1 - -"vpshab", "vpshaw", "vpshad" and "vpshaq" arithmetically shift bytes, words, -double words or quad words. These instructions follow the same rules as the -logical shifts described above. "vprotb", "vprotw", "vprotd" and "vprotq" -rotate bytes, word, double words or quad words. They follow the same rules as -shifts, but additionally allow third operand to be immediate value, in which -case the same amount of rotation is specified for all the elements in source. - - vprotb xmm0,[esi],3 ; rotate bytes to the left - - The MOVBE extension introduces just one new instruction, "movbe", which -swaps bytes in value from source before storing it in destination, so can -be used to load and store big endian values. It takes two operands, either -the destination or source should be a 16-bit, 32-bit or 64-bit memory (the -last one being only allowed in long mode), and the other operand should be -a general register of the same size. - The BMI extension, consisting of two subsets - BMI1 and BMI2, introduces -new instructions operating on general registers, which use the same encoding -as AVX instructions and so allow the extended syntax. All these instructions -use 32-bit operands, and in long mode they also allow the forms with 64-bit -operands. - "andn" calculates the bitwise AND of second source with the inverted bits -of first source and stores the result in destination. The destination and -the first source have to be general registers, the second source can be -general register or memory. - - andn edx,eax,[ebx] ; bit-multiply inverted eax with memory - - "bextr" extracts from the first source the sequence of bits using an index -and length specified by bit fields in the second source operand and stores -it into destination. The lowest 8 bits of second source specify the position -of bit sequence to extract and the next 8 bits of second source specify the -length of sequence. The first source can be a general register or memory, -the other two operands have to be general registers. - - bextr eax,[esi],ecx ; extract bit field from memory - - "blsi" extracts the lowest set bit from the source, setting all the other -bits in destination to zero. The destination must be a general register, -the source can be general register or memory. - - blsi rax,r11 ; isolate the lowest set bit - - "blsmsk" sets all the bits in the destination up to the lowest set bit in -the source, including this bit. "blsr" copies all the bits from the source to -destination except for the lowest set bit, which is replaced by zero. These -instructions follow the same rules for operands as "blsi". - "tzcnt" counts the number of trailing zero bits, that is the zero bits up to -the lowest set bit of source value. This instruction is analogous to "lzcnt" -and follows the same rules for operands, so it also has a 16-bit version, -unlike the other BMI instructions. - "bzhi" is BMI2 instruction, which copies the bits from first source to -destination, zeroing all the bits up from the position specified by second -source. It follows the same rules for operands as "bextr". - "pext" uses a mask in second source operand to select bits from first -operands and puts the selected bits as a continuous sequence into destination. -"pdep" performs the reverse operation - it takes sequence of bits from the -first source and puts them consecutively at the positions where the bits in -second source are set, setting all the other bits in destination to zero. -These BMI2 instructions follow the same rules for operands as "andn". - "mulx" is a BMI2 instruction which performs an unsigned multiplication of -value from EDX or RDX register (depending on the size of specified operands) -by the value from third operand, and stores the low half of result in the -second operand, and the high half of result in the first operand, and it does -it without affecting the flags. The third operand can be general register or -memory, and both the destination operands have to be general registers. - - mulx edx,eax,ecx ; multiply edx by ecx into edx:eax - - "shlx", "shrx" and "sarx" are BMI2 instructions, which perform logical or -arithmetical shifts of value from first source by the amount specified by -second source, and store the result in destination without affecting the -flags. The have the same rules for operands as "bzhi" instruction. - "rorx" is a BMI2 instruction which rotates right the value from source -operand by the constant amount specified in third operand and stores the -result in destination without affecting the flags. The destination operand -has to be general register, the source operand can be general register or -memory, and the third operand has to be an immediate value. - - rorx eax,edx,7 ; rotate without affecting flags - - The TBM is an extension designed by AMD to supplement the BMI set. The -"bextr" instruction is extended with a new form, in which second source is -a 32-bit immediate value. "blsic" is a new instruction which performs the -same operation as "blsi", but with the bits of result reversed. It uses the -same rules for operands as "blsi". "blsfill" is a new instruction, which takes -the value from source, sets all the bits below the lowest set bit and store -the result in destination, it also uses the same rules for operands as "blsi". - "blci", "blcic", "blcs", "blcmsk" and "blcfill" are instructions analogous -to "blsi", "blsic", "blsr", "blsmsk" and "blsfill" respectively, but they -perform the bit-inverted versions of the same operations. They follow the -same rules for operands as the instructions they reflect. - "tzmsk" finds the lowest set bit in value from source operand, sets all bits -below it to 1 and all the rest of bits to zero, then writes the result to -destination. "t1mskc" finds the least significant zero bit in the value from -source operand, sets the bits below it to zero and all the other bits to 1, -and writes the result to destination. These instructions have the same rules -for operands as "blsi". - - -2.1.24 Other extensions of instruction set - -There is a number of additional instruction set extensions recognized by flat -assembler, and the general syntax of the instructions introduced by those -extensions is provided here. For a detailed information on the operations -performed by them, check out the manuals from Intel (for the VMX, SMX, XSAVE, -RDRAND, FSGSBASE, INVPCID, HLE and RTM extensions) or AMD (for the SVM -extension). - The Virtual-Machine Extensions (VMX) provide a set of instructions for the -management of virtual machines. The "vmxon" instruction, which enters the VMX -operation, requires a single 64-bit memory operand, which should be a physical -address of memory region, which the logical processor may use to support VMX -operation. The "vmxoff" instruction, which leaves the VMX operation, has no -operands. The "vmlaunch" and "vmresume", which launch or resume the virtual -machines, and "vmcall", which allows guest software to call the VM monitor, -use no operands either. - The "vmptrld" loads the physical address of current Virtual Machine Control -Structure (VMCS) from its memory operand, "vmptrst" stores the pointer to -current VMCS into address specified by its memory operand, and "vmclear" sets -the launch state of the VMCS referenced by its memory operand to clear. These -three instruction all require single 64-bit memory operand. - The "vmread" reads from VCMS a field specified by the source operand and -stores it into the destination operand. The source operand should be a -general purpose register, and the destination operand can be a register of -memory. The "vmwrite" writes into a VMCS field specified by the destination -operand the value provided by source operand. The source operand can be a -general purpose register or memory, and the destination operand must be a -register. The size of operands for those instructions should be 64-bit when -in long mode, and 32-bit otherwise. - The "invept" and "invvpid" invalidate the translation lookaside buffers -(TLBs) and paging-structure caches, either derived from extended page tables -(EPT), or based on the virtual processor identifier (VPID). These instructions -require two operands, the first one being the general purpose register -specifying the type of invalidation, and the second one being a 128-bit -memory operand providing the invalidation descriptor. The first operand -should be a 64-bit register when in long mode, and 32-bit register otherwise. - The Safer Mode Extensions (SMX) provide the functionalities available -throught the "getsec" instruction. This instruction takes no operands, and -the function that is executed is determined by the contents of EAX register -upon executing this instruction. - The Secure Virtual Machine (SVM) is a variant of virtual machine extension -used by AMD. The "skinit" instruction securely reinitializes the processor -allowing the startup of trusted software, such as the virtual machine monitor -(VMM). This instruction takes a single operand, which must be EAX, and -provides a physical address of the secure loader block (SLB). - The "vmrun" instruction is used to start a guest virtual machine, -its only operand should be an accumulator register (AX, EAX or RAX, the -last one available only in long mode) providing the physical address of the -virtual machine control block (VMCB). The "vmsave" stores a subset of -processor state into VMCB specified by its operand, and "vmload" loads the -same subset of processor state from a specified VMCB. The same operand rules -as for the "vmrun" apply to those two instructions. - "vmmcall" allows the guest software to call the VMM. This instruction takes -no operands. - "stgi" set the global interrupt flag to 1, and "clgi" zeroes it. These -instructions take no operands. - "invlpga" invalidates the TLB mapping for a virtual page specified by the -first operand (which has to be accumulator register) and address space -identifier specified by the second operand (which must be ECX register). - The XSAVE set of instructions allows to save and restore processor state -components. "xsave" and "xsaveopt" store the components of processor state -defined by bit mask in EDX and EAX registers into area defined by memory -operand. "xrstor" restores from the area specified by memory operand the -components of processor state defined by mask in EDX and EAX. The "xsave64", -"xsaveopt64" and "xrstor64" are 64-bit versions of these instructions, allowed -only in long mode. - "xgetbv" read the contents of 64-bit XCR (extended control register) -specified in ECX register into EDX and EAX registers. "xsetbv" writes the -contents of EDX and EAX into the 64-bit XCR specified by ECX register. These -instructions have no operands. - The RDRAND extension introduces one new instruction, "rdrand", which loads -the hardware-generated random value into general register. It takes one -operand, which can be 16-bit, 32-bit or 64-bit register (with the last one -being allowed only in long mode). - The FSGSBASE extension adds long mode instructions that allow to read and -write the segment base registers for FS and GS segments. "rdfsbase" and -"rdgsbase" read the corresponding segment base registers into operand, while -"wrfsbase" and "wrgsbase" write the value of operand into those register. -All these instructions take one operand, which can be 32-bit or 64-bit general -register. - The INVPCID extension adds "invpcid" instruction, which invalidates mapping -in the TLBs and paging caches based on the invalidation type specified in -first operand and PCID invalidate descriptor specified in second operand. -The first operands should be 32-bit general register when not in long mode, -or 64-bit general register when in long mode. The second operand should be -128-bit memory location. - The HLE and RTM extensions provide set of instructions for the transactional -management. The "xacquire" and "xrelease" are new prefixes that can be used -with some of the instructions to start or end lock elision on the memory -address specified by prefixed instruction. The "xbegin" instruction starts -the transactional execution, its operand is the address a fallback routine -that gets executes in case of transaction abort, specified like the operand -for near jump instruction. "xend" marks the end of transcational execution -region, it takes no operands. "xabort" forces the transaction abort, it takes -an 8-bit immediate value as its only operand, this value is passed in the -highest bits of EAX to the fallback routine. "xtest" checks whether there is -transactional execution in progress, this instruction takes no operands. - - -2.2 Control directives - -This section describes the directives that control the assembly process, they -are processed during the assembly and may cause some blocks of instructions -to be assembled differently or not assembled at all. - - -2.2.1 Numerical constants - -The "=" directive allows to define the numerical constant. It should be -preceded by the name for the constant and followed by the numerical expression -providing the value. The value of such constants can be a number or an address, -but - unlike labels - the numerical constants are not allowed to hold the -register-based addresses. Besides this difference, in their basic variant -numerical constants behave very much like labels and you can even -forward-reference them (access their values before they actually get defined). - There is, however, a second variant of numerical constants, which is -recognized by assembler when you try to define the constant of name, under -which there already was a numerical constant defined. In such case assembler -treats that constant as an assembly-time variable and allows it to be assigned -with new value, but forbids forward-referencing it (for obvious reasons). Let's -see both the variant of numerical constants in one example: - - dd sum - x = 1 - x = x+2 - sum = x - -Here the "x" is an assembly-time variable, and every time it is accessed, the -value that was assigned to it the most recently is used. Thus if we tried to -access the "x" before it gets defined the first time, like if we wrote "dd x" -in place of the "dd sum" instruction, it would cause an error. And when it is -re-defined with the "x = x+2" directive, the previous value of "x" is used to -calculate the new one. So when the "sum" constant gets defined, the "x" has -value of 3, and this value is assigned to the "sum". Since this one is defined -only once in source, it is the standard numerical constant, and can be -forward-referenced. So the "dd sum" is assembled as "dd 3". To read more about -how the assembler is able to resolve this, see section 2.2.6. - The value of numerical constant can be preceded by size operator, which can -ensure that the value will fit in the range for the specified size, and can -affect also how some of the calculations inside the numerical expression are -performed. This example: - - c8 = byte -1 - c32 = dword -1 - -defines two different constants, the first one fits in 8 bits, the second one -fits in 32 bits. - When you need to define constant with the value of address, which may be -register-based (and thus you cannot employ numerical constant for this -purpose), you can use the extended syntax of "label" directive (already -described in section 1.2.3), like: - - label myaddr at ebp+4 - -which declares label placed at "ebp+4" address. However remember that labels, -unlike numerical constants, cannot become assembly-time variables. - - -2.2.2 Conditional assembly - -"if" directive causes some block of instructions to be assembled only under -certain condition. It should be followed by logical expression specifying the -condition, instructions in next lines will be assembled only when this -condition is met, otherwise they will be skipped. The optional "else if" -directive followed with logical expression specifying additional condition -begins the next block of instructions that will be assembled if previous -conditions were not met, and the additional condition is met. The optional -"else" directive begins the block of instructions that will be assembled if -all the conditions were not met. The "end if" directive ends the last block of -instructions. - You should note that "if" directive is processed at assembly stage and -therefore it doesn't affect any preprocessor directives, like the definitions -of symbolic constants and macroinstructions - when the assembler recognizes the -"if" directive, all the preprocessing has been already finished. - The logical expression consist of logical values and logical operators. The -logical operators are "~" for logical negation, "&" for logical and, "|" for -logical or. The negation has the highest priority. Logical value can be a -numerical expression, it will be false if it is equal to zero, otherwise it -will be true. Two numerical expression can be compared using one of the -following operators to make the logical value: "=" (equal), "<" (less), -">" (greater), "<=" (less or equal), ">=" (greater or equal), -"<>" (not equal). - The "used" operator followed by a symbol name, is the logical value that -checks whether the given symbol is used somewhere (it returns correct result -even if symbol is used only after this check). The "defined" operator can be -followed by any expression, usually just by a single symbol name; it checks -whether the given expression contains only symbols that are defined in the -source and accessible from the current position. - With "relativeto" operator it is possible to check whether values of two -expressions differ only by constant amount. The valid syntax is a numerical -expression followed by "relativeto" and then another expression (possibly -register-based). Labels that have no simple numerical value can be tested -this way to determine what kind of operations may be possible with them. - The following simple example uses the "count" constant that should be -defined somewhere in source: - - if count>0 - mov cx,count - rep movsb - end if - -These two assembly instructions will be assembled only if the "count" constant -is greater than 0. The next sample shows more complex conditional structure: - - if count & ~ count mod 4 - mov cx,count/4 - rep movsd - else if count>4 - mov cx,count/4 - rep movsd - mov cx,count mod 4 - rep movsb - else - mov cx,count - rep movsb - end if - -The first block of instructions gets assembled when the "count" is non zero and -divisible by four, if this condition is not met, the second logical expression, -which follows the "else if", is evaluated and if it's true, the second block -of instructions get assembled, otherwise the last block of instructions, which -follows the line containing only "else", is assembled. - There are also operators that allow comparison of values being any chains of -symbols. The "eq" compares whether two such values are exactly the same. -The "in" operator checks whether given value is a member of the list of values -following this operator, the list should be enclosed between "<" and ">" -characters, its members should be separated with commas. The symbols are -considered the same when they have the same meaning for the assembler - for -example "pword" and "fword" for assembler are the same and thus are not -distinguished by the above operators. In the same way "16 eq 10h" is the true -condition, however "16 eq 10+4" is not. - The "eqtype" operator checks whether the two compared values have the same -structure, and whether the structural elements are of the same type. The -distinguished types include numerical expressions, individual quoted strings, -floating point numbers, address expressions (the expressions enclosed in square -brackets or preceded by "ptr" operator), instruction mnemonics, registers, size -operators, jump type and code type operators. And each of the special -characters that act as a separators, like comma or colon, is the separate type -itself. For example, two values, each one consisting of register name followed -by comma and numerical expression, will be regarded as of the same type, no -matter what kind of register and how complicated numerical expression is used; -with exception for the quoted strings and floating point values, which are the -special kinds of numerical expressions and are treated as different types. Thus -"eax,16 eqtype fs,3+7" condition is true, but "eax,16 eqtype eax,1.6" is false. - - -2.2.3 Repeating blocks of instructions - -"times" directive repeats one instruction specified number of times. It -should be followed by numerical expression specifying number of repeats and -the instruction to repeat (optionally colon can be used to separate number and -instruction). When special symbol "%" is used inside the instruction, it is -equal to the number of current repeat. For example "times 5 db %" will define -five bytes with values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Recursive use of "times" directive is -also allowed, so "times 3 times % db %" will define six bytes with values -1, 1, 2, 1, 2, 3. - "repeat" directive repeats the whole block of instructions. It should be -followed by numerical expression specifying number of repeats. Instructions -to repeat are expected in next lines, ended with the "end repeat" directive, -for example: - - repeat 8 - mov byte [bx],% - inc bx - end repeat - -The generated code will store byte values from one to eight in the memory -addressed by BX register. - Number of repeats can be zero, in that case the instructions are not -assembled at all. - The "break" directive allows to stop repeating earlier and continue assembly -from the first line after the "end repeat". Combined with the "if" directive it -allows to stop repeating under some special condition, like: - - s = x/2 - repeat 100 - if x/s = s - break - end if - s = (s+x/s)/2 - end repeat - - The "while" directive repeats the block of instructions as long as the -condition specified by the logical expression following it is true. The block -of instructions to be repeated should end with the "end while" directive. -Before each repetition the logical expression is evaluated and when its value -is false, the assembly is continued starting from the first line after the -"end while". Also in this case the "%" symbol holds the number of current -repeat. The "break" directive can be used to stop this kind of loop in the same -way as with "repeat" directive. The previous sample can be rewritten to use the -"while" instead of "repeat" this way: - - s = x/2 - while x/s <> s - s = (s+x/s)/2 - if % = 100 - break - end if - end while - - The blocks defined with "if", "repeat" and "while" can be nested in any -order, however they should be closed in the same order in which they were -started. The "break" directive always stops processing the block that was -started last with either the "repeat" or "while" directive. - - -2.2.4 Addressing spaces - - "org" directive sets address at which the following code is expected to -appear in memory. It should be followed by numerical expression specifying -the address. This directive begins the new addressing space, the following -code itself is not moved in any way, but all the labels defined within it -and the value of "$" symbol are affected as if it was put at the given -address. However it's the responsibility of programmer to put the code at -correct address at run-time. - The "load" directive allows to define constant with a binary value loaded -from the already assembled code. This directive should be followed by the name -of the constant, then optionally size operator, then "from" operator and a -numerical expression specifying a valid address in current addressing space. -The size operator has unusual meaning in this case - it states how many bytes -(up to 8) have to be loaded to form the binary value of constant. If no size -operator is specified, one byte is loaded (thus value is in range from 0 to -255). The loaded data cannot exceed current offset. - The "store" directive can modify the already generated code by replacing -some of the previously generated data with the value defined by given -numerical expression, which follows. The expression can be preceded by the -optional size operator to specify how large value the expression defines, and -therefore how much bytes will be stored, if there is no size operator, the -size of one byte is assumed. Then the "at" operator and the numerical -expression defining the valid address in current addressing code space, at -which the given value have to be stored should follow. This is a directive for -advanced appliances and should be used carefully. - Both "load" and "store" directives are limited to operate on places in -current addressing space. The "$$" symbol is always equal to the base address -of current addressing space, and the "$" symbol is the address of current -position in that addressing space, therefore these two values define limits -of the area, where "load" and "store" can operate. - Combining the "load" and "store" directives allows to do things like encoding -some of the already generated code. For example to encode the whole code -generated in current addressing space you can use such block of directives: - - repeat $-$$ - load a byte from $$+%-1 - store byte a xor c at $$+%-1 - end repeat - -and each byte of code will be xored with the value defined by "c" constant. - "virtual" defines virtual data at specified address. This data will not be -included in the output file, but labels defined there can be used in other -parts of source. This directive can be followed by "at" operator and the -numerical expression specifying the address for virtual data, otherwise is -uses current address, the same as "virtual at $". Instructions defining data -are expected in next lines, ended with "end virtual" directive. The block of -virtual instructions itself is an independent addressing space, after it's -ended, the context of previous addressing space is restored. - The "virtual" directive can be used to create union of some variables, for -example: - - GDTR dp ? - virtual at GDTR - GDT_limit dw ? - GDT_address dd ? - end virtual - -It defines two labels for parts of the 48-bit variable at "GDTR" address. - It can be also used to define labels for some structures addressed by a -register, for example: - - virtual at bx - LDT_limit dw ? - LDT_address dd ? - end virtual - -With such definition instruction "mov ax,[LDT_limit]" will be assembled -to the same instruction as "mov ax,[bx]". - Declaring defined data values or instructions inside the virtual block would -also be useful, because the "load" directive can be used to load the values -from the virtually generated code into a constants. This directive should be -used after the code it loads but before the virtual block ends, because it can -only load the values from the same addressing space. For example: - - virtual at 0 - xor eax,eax - and edx,eax - load zeroq dword from 0 - end virtual - -The above piece of code will define the "zeroq" constant containing four bytes -of the machine code of the instructions defined inside the virtual block. -This method can be also used to load some binary value from external file. -For example this code: - - virtual at 0 - file 'a.txt':10h,1 - load char from 0 - end virtual - -loads the single byte from offset 10h in file "a.txt" into the "char" -constant. - Any of the "section" directives described in 2.4 also begins a new -addressing space. - - -2.2.5 Other directives - -"align" directive aligns code or data to the specified boundary. It should -be followed by a numerical expression specifying the number of bytes, to the -multiply of which the current address has to be aligned. The boundary value -has to be the power of two. - The "align" directive fills the bytes that had to be skipped to perform the -alignment with the "nop" instructions and at the same time marks this area as -uninitialized data, so if it is placed among other uninitialized data that -wouldn't take space in the output file, the alignment bytes will act the same -way. If you need to fill the alignment area with some other values, you can -combine "align" with "virtual" to get the size of alignment needed and then -create the alignment yourself, like: - - virtual - align 16 - a = $ - $$ - end virtual - db a dup 0 - -The "a" constant is defined to be the difference between address after -alignment and address of the "virtual" block (see previous section), so it is -equal to the size of needed alignment space. - "display" directive displays the message at the assembly time. It should -be followed by the quoted strings or byte values, separated with commas. It -can be used to display values of some constants, for example: - - bits = 16 - display 'Current offset is 0x' - repeat bits/4 - d = '0' + $ shr (bits-%*4) and 0Fh - if d > '9' - d = d + 'A'-'9'-1 - end if - display d - end repeat - display 13,10 - -This block of directives calculates the four hexadecimal digits of 16-bit -value and converts them into characters for displaying. Note that this will -not work if the adresses in current addressing space are relocatable (as it -might happen with PE or object output formats), since only absolute values can -be used this way. The absolute value may be obtained by calculating the -relative address, like "$-$$", or "rva $" in case of PE format. - The "err" directive immediately terminates the assembly process when it is -encountered by assembler. - The "assert" directive tests whether the logical expression that follows it -is true, and if not, it signalizes the error. - - -2.2.6 Multiple passes - -Because the assembler allows to reference some of the labels or constants -before they get actually defined, it has to predict the values of such labels -and if there is even a suspicion that prediction failed in at least one case, -it does one more pass, assembling the whole source, this time doing better -prediction based on the values the labels got in the previous pass. - The changing values of labels can cause some instructions to have encodings -of different length, and this can cause the change in values of labels again. -And since the labels and constants can also be used inside the expressions that -affect the behavior of control directives, the whole block of source can be -processed completely differently during the new pass. Thus the assembler does -more and more passes, each time trying to do better predictions to approach -the final solution, when all the values get predicted correctly. It uses -various method for predicting the values, which has been chosen to allow -finding in a few passes the solution of possibly smallest length for the most -of the programs. - Some of the errors, like the values not fitting in required boundaries, are -not signaled during those intermediate passes, since it may happen that when -some of the values are predicted better, these errors will disappear. However -if assembler meets some illegal syntax construction or unknown instruction, it -always stops immediately. Also defining some label more than once causes such -error, because it makes the predictions groundless. - Only the messages created with the "display" directive during the last -performed pass get actually displayed. In case when the assembly has been -stopped due to an error, these messages may reflect the predicted values that -are not yet resolved correctly. - The solution may sometimes not exist and in such cases the assembler will -never manage to make correct predictions - for this reason there is a limit for -a number of passes, and when assembler reaches this limit, it stops and -displays the message that it is not able to generate the correct output. -Consider the following example: - - if ~ defined alpha - alpha: - end if - -The "defined" operator gives the true value when the expression following it -could be calculated in this place, what in this case means that the "alpha" -label is defined somewhere. But the above block causes this label to be defined -only when the value given by "defined" operator is false, what leads to an -antynomy and makes it impossible to resolve such code. When processing the "if" -directive assembler has to predict whether the "alpha" label will be defined -somewhere (it wouldn't have to predict only if the label was already defined -earlier in this pass), and whatever the prediction is, the opposite always -happens. Thus the assembly will fail, unless the "alpha" label is defined -somewhere in source preceding the above block of instructions - in such case, -as it was already noted, the prediction is not needed and the block will just -get skipped. - The above sample might have been written as a try to define the label only -when it was not yet defined. It fails, because the "defined" operator does -check whether the label is defined anywhere, and this includes the definition -inside this conditionally processed block. However adding some additional -condition may make it possible to get it resolved: - - if ~ defined alpha | defined @f - alpha: - @@: - end if - -The "@f" is always the same label as the nearest "@@" symbol in the source -following it, so the above sample would mean the same if any unique name was -used instead of the anonymous label. When "alpha" is not defined in any other -place in source, the only possible solution is when this block gets defined, -and this time this doesn't lead to the antynomy, because of the anonymous -label which makes this block self-establishing. To better understand this, -look at the blocks that has nothing more than this self-establishing: - - if defined @f - @@: - end if - -This is an example of source that may have more than one solution, as both -cases when this block gets processed or not are equally correct. Which one of -those two solutions we get depends on the algorithm on the assembler, in case -of flat assembler - on the algorithm of predictions. Back to the previous -sample, when "alpha" is not defined anywhere else, the condition for "if" block -cannot be false, so we are left with only one possible solution, and we can -hope the assembler will arrive at it. On the other hand, when "alpha" is -defined in some other place, we've got two possible solutions again, but one of -them causes "alpha" to be defined twice, and such an error causes assembler to -abort the assembly immediately, as this is the kind of error that deeply -disturbs the process of resolving. So we can get such source either correctly -resolved or causing an error, and what we get may depend on the internal -choices made by the assembler. - However there are some facts about such choices that are certain. When -assembler has to check whether the given symbol is defined and it was already -defined in the current pass, no prediction is needed - it was already noted -above. And when the given symbol has been defined never before, including all -the already finished passes, the assembler predicts it to be not defined. -Knowing this, we can expect that the simple self-establishing block shown -above will not be assembled at all and that the previous sample will resolve -correctly when "alpha" is defined somewhere before our conditional block, -while it will itself define "alpha" when it's not already defined earlier, thus -potentially causing the error because of double definition if the "alpha" is -also defined somewhere later. - The "used" operator may be expected to behave in a similar manner in -analogous cases, however any other kinds of predictions my not be so simple and -you should never rely on them this way. - The "err" directive, usually used to stop the assembly when some condition is -met, stops the assembly immediately, regardless of whether the current pass -is final or intermediate. So even when the condition that caused this directive -to be interpreted is mispredicted and temporary, and would eventually disappear -in the later passes, the assembly is stopped anyway. - The "assert" directive signalizes the error only if its expression is false -after all the symbols have been resolved. You can use "assert 0" in place of -"err" when you do not want to have assembly stopped during the intermediate -passes. - - -2.3 Preprocessor directives - -All preprocessor directives are processed before the main assembly process, -and therefore are not affected by the control directives. At this time also -all comments are stripped out. - - -2.3.1 Including source files - -"include" directive includes the specified source file at the position where -it is used. It should be followed by the quoted name of file that should be -included, for example: - - include 'macros.inc' - -The whole included file is preprocessed before preprocessing the lines next -to the line containing the "include" directive. There are no limits to the -number of included files as long as they fit in memory. - The quoted path can contain environment variables enclosed within "%" -characters, they will be replaced with their values inside the path, both the -"\" and "/" characters are allowed as a path separators. The file is first -searched for in the directory containing file which included it and when it is -not found there, the search is continued in the directories specified in the -environment variable called INCLUDE (the multiple paths separated with -semicolons can be defined there, they will be searched in the same order as -specified). If file was not found in any of these places, preprocessor looks -for it in the directory containing the main source file (the one specified in -command line). These rules concern also paths given with the "file" directive. - - -2.3.2 Symbolic constants - -The symbolic constants are different from the numerical constants, before the -assembly process they are replaced with their values everywhere in source -lines after their definitions, and anything can become their values. - The definition of symbolic constant consists of name of the constant -followed by the "equ" directive. Everything that follows this directive will -become the value of constant. If the value of symbolic constant contains -other symbolic constants, they are replaced with their values before assigning -this value to the new constant. For example: - - d equ dword - NULL equ d 0 - d equ edx - -After these three definitions the value of "NULL" constant is "dword 0" and -the value of "d" is "edx". So, for example, "push NULL" will be assembled as -"push dword 0" and "push d" will be assembled as "push edx". And if then the -following line was put: - - d equ d,eax - -the "d" constant would get the new value of "edx,eax". This way the growing -lists of symbols can be defined. - "restore" directive allows to get back previous value of redefined symbolic -constant. It should be followed by one more names of symbolic constants, -separated with commas. So "restore d" after the above definitions will give -"d" constant back the value "edx", the second one will restore it to value -"dword", and one more will revert "d" to original meaning as if no such -constant was defined. If there was no constant defined of given name, -"restore" will not cause an error, it will be just ignored. - Symbolic constant can be used to adjust the syntax of assembler to personal -preferences. For example the following set of definitions provides the handy -shortcuts for all the size operators: - - b equ byte - w equ word - d equ dword - p equ pword - f equ fword - q equ qword - t equ tword - x equ dqword - y equ qqword - - Because symbolic constant may also have an empty value, it can be used to -allow the syntax with "offset" word before any address value: - - offset equ - -After this definition "mov ax,offset char" will be valid construction for -copying the offset of "char" variable into "ax" register, because "offset" is -replaced with an empty value, and therefore ignored. - The "define" directive followed by the name of constant and then the value, -is the alternative way of defining symbolic constant. The only difference -between "define" and "equ" is that "define" assigns the value as it is, it does -not replace the symbolic constants with their values inside it. - Symbolic constants can also be defined with the "fix" directive, which has -the same syntax as "equ", but defines constants of high priority - they are -replaced with their symbolic values even before processing the preprocessor -directives and macroinstructions, the only exception is "fix" directive -itself, which has the highest possible priority, so it allows redefinition of -constants defined this way. - The "fix" directive can be used for syntax adjustments related to directives -of preprocessor, what cannot be done with "equ" directive. For example: - - incl fix include - -defines a short name for "include" directive, while the similar definition done -with "equ" directive wouldn't give such result, as standard symbolic constants -are replaced with their values after searching the line for preprocessor -directives. - - -2.3.3 Macroinstructions - -"macro" directive allows you to define your own complex instructions, called -macroinstructions, using which can greatly simplify the process of -programming. In its simplest form it's similar to symbolic constant -definition. For example the following definition defines a shortcut for the -"test al,0xFF" instruction: - - macro tst {test al,0xFF} - -After the "macro" directive there is a name of macroinstruction and then its -contents enclosed between the "{" and "}" characters. You can use "tst" -instruction anywhere after this definition and it will be assembled as -"test al,0xFF". Defining symbolic constant "tst" of that value would give the -similar result, but the difference is that the name of macroinstruction is -recognized only as an instruction mnemonic. Also, macroinstructions are -replaced with corresponding code even before the symbolic constants are -replaced with their values. So if you define macroinstruction and symbolic -constant of the same name, and use this name as an instruction mnemonic, it -will be replaced with the contents of macroinstruction, but it will be -replaced with value if symbolic constant if used somewhere inside the -operands. - The definition of macroinstruction can consist of many lines, because -"{" and "}" characters don't have to be in the same line as "macro" directive. -For example: - - macro stos0 - { - xor al,al - stosb - } - -The macroinstruction "stos0" will be replaced with these two assembly -instructions anywhere it's used. - Like instructions which needs some number of operands, the macroinstruction -can be defined to need some number of arguments separated with commas. The -names of needed argument should follow the name of macroinstruction in the -line of "macro" directive and should be separated with commas if there is more -than one. Anywhere one of these names occurs in the contents of -macroinstruction, it will be replaced with corresponding value, provided when -the macroinstruction is used. Here is an example of a macroinstruction that -will do data alignment for binary output format: - - macro align value { rb (value-1)-($+value-1) mod value } - -When the "align 4" instruction is found after this macroinstruction is -defined, it will be replaced with contents of this macroinstruction, and the -"value" will there become 4, so the result will be "rb (4-1)-($+4-1) mod 4". - If a macroinstruction is defined that uses an instruction with the same name -inside its definition, the previous meaning of this name is used. Useful -redefinition of macroinstructions can be done in that way, for example: - - macro mov op1,op2 - { - if op1 in & op2 in - push op2 - pop op1 - else - mov op1,op2 - end if - } - -This macroinstruction extends the syntax of "mov" instruction, allowing both -operands to be segment registers. For example "mov ds,es" will be assembled as -"push es" and "pop ds". In all other cases the standard "mov" instruction will -be used. The syntax of this "mov" can be extended further by defining next -macroinstruction of that name, which will use the previous macroinstruction: - - macro mov op1,op2,op3 - { - if op3 eq - mov op1,op2 - else - mov op1,op2 - mov op2,op3 - end if - } - -It allows "mov" instruction to have three operands, but it can still have two -operands only, because when macroinstruction is given less arguments than it -needs, the rest of arguments will have empty values. When three operands are -given, this macroinstruction will become two macroinstructions of the previous -definition, so "mov es,ds,dx" will be assembled as "push ds", "pop es" and -"mov ds,dx". - By placing the "*" after the name of argument you can mark the argument as -required - preprocessor will not allow it to have an empty value. For example -the above macroinstruction could be declared as "macro mov op1*,op2*,op3" to -make sure that first two arguments will always have to be given some non empty -values. - Alternatively, you can provide the default value for argument, by placing -the "=" followed by value after the name of argument. Then if the argument -has an empty value provided, the default value will be used instead. - When it's needed to provide macroinstruction with argument that contains -some commas, such argument should be enclosed between "<" and ">" characters. -If it contains more than one "<" character, the same number of ">" should be -used to tell that the value of argument ends. - "purge" directive allows removing the last definition of specified -macroinstruction. It should be followed by one or more names of -macroinstructions, separated with commas. If such macroinstruction has not -been defined, you will not get any error. For example after having the syntax -of "mov" extended with the macroinstructions defined above, you can disable -syntax with three operands back by using "purge mov" directive. Next -"purge mov" will disable also syntax for two operands being segment registers, -and all the next such directives will do nothing. - If after the "macro" directive you enclose some group of arguments' names in -square brackets, it will allow giving more values for this group of arguments -when using that macroinstruction. Any more argument given after the last -argument of such group will begin the new group and will become the first -argument of it. That's why after closing the square bracket no more argument -names can follow. The contents of macroinstruction will be processed for each -such group of arguments separately. The simplest example is to enclose one -argument name in square brackets: - - macro stoschar [char] - { - mov al,char - stosb - } - -This macroinstruction accepts unlimited number of arguments, and each one -will be processed into these two instructions separately. For example -"stoschar 1,2,3" will be assembled as the following instructions: - - mov al,1 - stosb - mov al,2 - stosb - mov al,3 - stosb - - There are some special directives available only inside the definitions of -macroinstructions. "local" directive defines local names, which will be -replaced with unique values each time the macroinstruction is used. It should -be followed by names separated with commas. If the name given as parameter to -"local" directive begins with a dot or two dots, the unique labels generated -by each evaluation of macroinstruction will have the same properties. -This directive is usually needed for the constants or labels that -macroinstruction defines and uses internally. For example: - - macro movstr - { - local move - move: - lodsb - stosb - test al,al - jnz move - } - -Each time this macroinstruction is used, "move" will become other unique name -in its instructions, so you will not get an error you normally get when some -label is defined more than once. - "forward", "reverse" and "common" directives divide macroinstruction into -blocks, each one processed after the processing of previous is finished. They -differ in behavior only if macroinstruction allows multiple groups of -arguments. Block of instructions that follows "forward" directive is processed -for each group of arguments, from first to last - exactly like the default -block (not preceded by any of these directives). Block that follows "reverse" -directive is processed for each group of argument in reverse order - from last -to first. Block that follows "common" directive is processed only once, -commonly for all groups of arguments. Local name defined in one of the blocks -is available in all the following blocks when processing the same group of -arguments as when it was defined, and when it is defined in common block it is -available in all the following blocks not depending on which group of -arguments is processed. - Here is an example of macroinstruction that will create the table of -addresses to strings followed by these strings: - - macro strtbl name,[string] - { - common - label name dword - forward - local label - dd label - forward - label db string,0 - } - -First argument given to this macroinstruction will become the label for table -of addresses, next arguments should be the strings. First block is processed -only once and defines the label, second block for each string declares its -local name and defines the table entry holding the address to that string. -Third block defines the data of each string with the corresponding label. - The directive starting the block in macroinstruction can be followed by the -first instruction of this block in the same line, like in the following -example: - - macro stdcall proc,[arg] - { - reverse push arg - common call proc - } - -This macroinstruction can be used for calling the procedures using STDCALL -convention, which has all the arguments pushed on stack in the reverse order. -For example "stdcall foo,1,2,3" will be assembled as: - - push 3 - push 2 - push 1 - call foo - - If some name inside macroinstruction has multiple values (it is either one -of the arguments enclosed in square brackets or local name defined in the -block following "forward" or "reverse" directive) and is used in block -following the "common" directive, it will be replaced with all of its values, -separated with commas. For example the following macroinstruction will pass -all of the additional arguments to the previously defined "stdcall" -macroinstruction: - - macro invoke proc,[arg] - { common stdcall [proc],arg } - -It can be used to call indirectly (by the pointer stored in memory) the -procedure using STDCALL convention. - Inside macroinstruction also special operator "#" can be used. This -operator causes two names to be concatenated into one name. It can be useful, -because it's done after the arguments and local names are replaced with their -values. The following macroinstruction will generate the conditional jump -according to the "cond" argument: - - macro jif op1,cond,op2,label - { - cmp op1,op2 - j#cond label - } - -For example "jif ax,ae,10h,exit" will be assembled as "cmp ax,10h" and -"jae exit" instructions. - The "#" operator can be also used to concatenate two quoted strings into one. -Also conversion of name into a quoted string is possible, with the "`" operator, -which likewise can be used inside the macroinstruction. It converts the name -that follows it into a quoted string - but note, that when it is followed by -a macro argument which is being replaced with value containing more than one -symbol, only the first of them will be converted, as the "`" operator converts -only one symbol that immediately follows it. Here's an example of utilizing -those two features: - - macro label name - { - label name - if ~ used name - display `name # " is defined but not used.",13,10 - end if - } - -When label defined with such macro is not used in the source, macro will warn -you with the message, informing to which label it applies. - To make macroinstruction behaving differently when some of the arguments are -of some special type, for example a quoted strings, you can use "eqtype" -comparison operator. Here's an example of utilizing it to distinguish a -quoted string from an other argument: - - macro message arg - { - if arg eqtype "" - local str - jmp @f - str db arg,0Dh,0Ah,24h - @@: - mov dx,str - else - mov dx,arg - end if - mov ah,9 - int 21h - } - -The above macro is designed for displaying messages in DOS programs. When the -argument of this macro is some number, label, or variable, the string from -that address is displayed, but when the argument is a quoted string, the -created code will display that string followed by the carriage return and -line feed. - It is also possible to put a declaration of macroinstruction inside another -macroinstruction, so one macro can define another, but there is a problem -with such definitions caused by the fact, that "}" character cannot occur -inside the macroinstruction, as it always means the end of definition. To -overcome this problem, the escaping of symbols inside macroinstruction can be -used. This is done by placing one or more backslashes in front of any other -symbol (even the special character). Preprocessor sees such sequence as a -single symbol, but each time it meets such symbol during the macroinstruction -processing, it cuts the backslash character from the front of it. For example -"\{" is treated as single symbol, but during processing of the macroinstruction -it becomes the "{" symbol. This allows to put one definition of -macroinstruction inside another: - - macro ext instr - { - macro instr op1,op2,op3 - \{ - if op3 eq - instr op1,op2 - else - instr op1,op2 - instr op2,op3 - end if - \} - } - - ext add - ext sub - -The macro "ext" is defined correctly, but when it is used, the "\{" and "\}" -become the "{" and "}" symbols. So when the "ext add" is processed, the -contents of macro becomes valid definition of a macroinstruction and this way -the "add" macro becomes defined. In the same way "ext sub" defines the "sub" -macro. The use of "\{" symbol wasn't really necessary here, but is done this -way to make the definition more clear. - If some directives specific to macroinstructions, like "local" or "common" -are needed inside some macro embedded this way, they can be escaped in the same -way. Escaping the symbol with more than one backslash is also allowed, which -allows multiple levels of nesting the macroinstruction definitions. - The another technique for defining one macroinstruction by another is to -use the "fix" directive, which becomes useful when some macroinstruction only -begins the definition of another one, without closing it. For example: - - macro tmacro [params] - { - common macro params { - } - - MACRO fix tmacro - ENDM fix } - -defines an alternative syntax for defining macroinstructions, which looks like: - - MACRO stoschar char - mov al,char - stosb - ENDM - -Note that symbol that has such customized definition must be defined with "fix" -directive, because only the prioritized symbolic constants are processed before -the preprocessor looks for the "}" character while defining the macro. This -might be a problem if one needed to perform some additional tasks one the end -of such definition, but there is one more feature which helps in such cases. -Namely it is possible to put any directive, instruction or macroinstruction -just after the "}" character that ends the macroinstruction and it will be -processed in the same way as if it was put in the next line. - - -2.3.4 Structures - -"struc" directive is a special variant of "macro" directive that is used to -define data structures. Macroinstruction defined using the "struc" directive -must be preceded by a label (like the data definition directive) when it's -used. This label will be also attached at the beginning of every name starting -with dot in the contents of macroinstruction. The macroinstruction defined -using the "struc" directive can have the same name as some other -macroinstruction defined using the "macro" directive, structure -macroinstruction will not prevent the standard macroinstruction from being -processed when there is no label before it and vice versa. All the rules and -features concerning standard macroinstructions apply to structure -macroinstructions. - Here is the sample of structure macroinstruction: - - struc point x,y - { - .x dw x - .y dw y - } - -For example "my point 7,11" will define structure labeled "my", consisting of -two variables: "my.x" with value 7 and "my.y" with value 11. - If somewhere inside the definition of structure the name consisting of a -single dot it found, it is replaced by the name of the label for the given -instance of structure and this label will not be defined automatically in -such case, allowing to completely customize the definition. The following -example utilizes this feature to extend the data definition directive "db" -with ability to calculate the size of defined data: - - struc db [data] - { - common - . db data - .size = $ - . - } - -With such definition "msg db 'Hello!',13,10" will define also "msg.size" -constant, equal to the size of defined data in bytes. - Defining data structures addressed by registers or absolute values should be -done using the "virtual" directive with structure macroinstruction -(see 2.2.4). - "restruc" directive removes the last definition of the structure, just like -"purge" does with macroinstructions and "restore" with symbolic constants. -It also has the same syntax - should be followed by one or more names of -structure macroinstructions, separated with commas. - - -2.3.5 Repeating macroinstructions - -The "rept" directive is a special kind of macroinstruction, which makes given -amount of duplicates of the block enclosed with braces. The basic syntax is -"rept" directive followed by number and then block of source enclosed between -the "{" and "}" characters. The simplest example: - - rept 5 { in al,dx } - -will make five duplicates of the "in al,dx" line. The block of instructions -is defined in the same way as for the standard macroinstruction and any -special operators and directives which can be used only inside -macroinstructions are also allowed here. When the given count is zero, the -block is simply skipped, as if you defined macroinstruction but never used -it. The number of repetitions can be followed by the name of counter symbol, -which will get replaced symbolically with the number of duplicate currently -generated. So this: - - rept 3 counter - { - byte#counter db counter - } - -will generate lines: - - byte1 db 1 - byte2 db 2 - byte3 db 3 - -The repetition mechanism applied to "rept" blocks is the same as the one used -to process multiple groups of arguments for macroinstructions, so directives -like "forward", "common" and "reverse" can be used in their usual meaning. -Thus such macroinstruction: - - rept 7 num { reverse display `num } - -will display digits from 7 to 1 as text. The "local" directive behaves in the -same way as inside macroinstruction with multiple groups of arguments, so: - - rept 21 - { - local label - label: loop label - } - -will generate unique label for each duplicate. - The counter symbol by default counts from 1, but you can declare different -base value by placing the number preceded by colon immediately after the name -of counter. For example: - - rept 8 n:0 { pxor xmm#n,xmm#n } - -will generate code which will clear the contents of eight SSE registers. -You can define multiple counters separated with commas, and each one can have -different base. - The number of repetitions and the base values for counters can be specified -using the numerical expressions with operator rules identical as in the case -of assembler. However each value used in such expression must either be a -directly specified number, or a symbolic constant with value also being an -expression that can be calculated by preprocessor (in such case the value -of expression associated with symbolic constant is calculated first, and then -substituted into the outer expression in place of that constant). If you need -repetitions based on values that can only be calculated at assembly time, use -one of the code repeating directives that are processed by assembler, see -section 2.2.3. - The "irp" directive iterates the single argument through the given list of -parameters. The syntax is "irp" followed by the argument name, then the comma -and then the list of parameters. The parameters are specified in the same -way like in the invocation of standard macroinstruction, so they have to be -separated with commas and each one can be enclosed with the "<" and ">" -characters. Also the name of argument may be followed by "*" to mark that it -cannot get an empty value. Such block: - - irp value, 2,3,5 - { db value } - -will generate lines: - - db 2 - db 3 - db 5 - -The "irps" directive iterates through the given list of symbols, it should -be followed by the argument name, then the comma and then the sequence of any -symbols. Each symbol in this sequence, no matter whether it is the name -symbol, symbol character or quoted string, becomes an argument value for one -iteration. If there are no symbols following the comma, no iteration is done -at all. This example: - - irps reg, al bx ecx - { xor reg,reg } - -will generate lines: - - xor al,al - xor bx,bx - xor ecx,ecx - -The blocks defined by the "irp" and "irps" directives are also processed in -the same way as any macroinstructions, so operators and directives specific -to macroinstructions may be freely used also in this case. - - -2.3.6 Conditional preprocessing - -"match" directive causes some block of source to be preprocessed and passed -to assembler only when the given sequence of symbols matches the specified -pattern. The pattern comes first, ended with comma, then the symbols that have -to be matched with the pattern, and finally the block of source, enclosed -within braces as macroinstruction. - There are the few rules for building the expression for matching, first is -that any of symbol characters and any quoted string should be matched exactly -as is. In this example: - - match +,+ { include 'first.inc' } - match +,- { include 'second.inc' } - -the first file will get included, since "+" after comma matches the "+" in -pattern, and the second file will not be included, since there is no match. - To match any other symbol literally, it has to be preceded by "=" character -in the pattern. Also to match the "=" character itself, or the comma, the -"==" and "=," constructions have to be used. For example the "=a==" pattern -will match the "a=" sequence. - If some name symbol is placed in the pattern, it matches any sequence -consisting of at least one symbol and then this name is replaced with the -matched sequence everywhere inside the following block, analogously to the -parameters of macroinstruction. For instance: - - match a-b, 0-7 - { dw a,b-a } - -will generate the "dw 0,7-0" instruction. Each name is always matched with -as few symbols as possible, leaving the rest for the following ones, so in -this case: - - match a b, 1+2+3 { db a } - -the "a" name will match the "1" symbol, leaving the "+2+3" sequence to be -matched with "b". But in this case: - - match a b, 1 { db a } - -there will be nothing left for "b" to match, so the block will not get -processed at all. - The block of source defined by match is processed in the same way as any -macroinstruction, so any operators specific to macroinstructions can be used -also in this case. - What makes "match" directive more useful is the fact, that it replaces the -symbolic constants with their values in the matched sequence of symbols (that -is everywhere after comma up to the beginning of the source block) before -performing the match. Thanks to this it can be used for example to process -some block of source under the condition that some symbolic constant has the -given value, like: - - match =TRUE, DEBUG { include 'debug.inc' } - -which will include the file only when the symbolic constant "DEBUG" was -defined with value "TRUE". - - -2.3.7 Order of processing - -When combining various features of the preprocessor, it's important to know -the order in which they are processed. As it was already noted, the highest -priority has the "fix" directive and the replacements defined with it. This -is done completely before doing any other preprocessing, therefore this -piece of source: - - V fix { - macro empty - V - V fix } - V - -becomes a valid definition of an empty macroinstruction. It can be interpreted -that the "fix" directive and prioritized symbolic constants are processed in -a separate stage, and all other preprocessing is done after on the resulting -source. - The standard preprocessing that comes after, on each line begins with -recognition of the first symbol. It starts with checking for the preprocessor -directives, and when none of them is detected, preprocessor checks whether the -first symbol is macroinstruction. If no macroinstruction is found, it moves -to the second symbol of line, and again begins with checking for directives, -which in this case is only the "equ" directive, as this is the only one that -occurs as the second symbol in line. If there is no directive, the second -symbol is checked for the case of structure macroinstruction and when none -of those checks gives the positive result, the symbolic constants are replaced -with their values and such line is passed to the assembler. - To see it on the example, assume that there is defined the macroinstruction -called "foo" and the structure macroinstruction called "bar". Those lines: - - foo equ - foo bar - -would be then both interpreted as invocations of macroinstruction "foo", since -the meaning of the first symbol overrides the meaning of second one. - When the macroinstruction generates the new lines from its definition block, -in every line it first scans for macroinstruction directives, and interpretes -them accordingly. All the other content in the definition block is used to -brew the new lines, replacing the macroinstruction parameters with their values -and then processing the symbol escaping and "#" and "`" operators. The -conversion operator has the higher priority than concatenation and if any of -them operates on the escaped symbol, the escaping is cancelled before finishing -the operation. After this is completed, the newly generated line goes through -the standard preprocessing, as described above. - Though the symbolic constants are usually only replaced in the lines, where -no preprocessor directives nor macroinstructions has been found, there are some -special cases where those replacements are performed in the parts of lines -containing directives. First one is the definition of symbolic constant, where -the replacements are done everywhere after the "equ" keyword and the resulting -value is then assigned to the new constant (see 2.3.2). The second such case -is the "match" directive, where the replacements are done in the symbols -following comma before matching them with pattern. These features can be used -for example to maintain the lists, like this set of definitions: - - list equ - - macro append item - { - match any, list \{ list equ list,item \} - match , list \{ list equ item \} - } - -The "list" constant is here initialized with empty value, and the "append" -macroinstruction can be used to add the new items into this list, separating -them with commas. The first match in this macroinstruction occurs only when -the value of list is not empty (see 2.3.6), in such case the new value for the -list is the previous one with the comma and the new item appended at the end. -The second match happens only when the list is still empty, and in such case -the list is defined to contain just the new item. So starting with the empty -list, the "append 1" would define "list equ 1" and the "append 2" following it -would define "list equ 1,2". One might then need to use this list as the -parameters to some macroinstruction. But it cannot be done directly - if "foo" -is the macroinstruction, then "foo list" would just pass the "list" symbol -as a parameter to macro, since symbolic constants are not unrolled at this -stage. For this purpose again "match" directive comes in handy: - - match params, list { foo params } - -The value of "list", if it's not empty, matches the "params" keyword, which is -then replaced with matched value when generating the new lines defined by the -block enclosed with braces. So if the "list" had value "1,2", the above line -would generate the line containing "foo 1,2", which would then go through the -standard preprocessing. - The other special case is in the parameters of "rept" directive. The amount -of repetitions and the base value for counter can be specified using -numerical expressions, and if there is a symbolic constant with non-numerical -name used in such an expression, preprocessor tries to evaluate its value as -a numerical expression and if succeeds, it replaces the symbolic constant with -the result of that calculation and continues to evaluate the primary -expression. If the expression inside that symbolic constants also contains -some symbolic constants, preprocessor will try to calculate all the needed -values recursively. - This allows to perform some calculations at the time of preprocessing, as -long as all the values used are the numbers known at the preprocessing stage. -A single repetition with "rept" can be used for the sole purpose of -calculating some value, like in this example: - - define a b+4 - define b 3 - rept 1 result:a*b+2 { define c result } - -To compute the base value for "result" counter, preprocessor replaces the "b" -with its value and recursively calculates the value of "a", obtaining 7 as -the result, then it calculates the main expression with the result being 23. -The "c" then gets defined with the first value of counter (because the block -is processed just one time), which is the result of the computation, so the -value of "c" is simple "23" symbol. Note that if "b" is later redefined with -some other numerical value, the next time and expression containing "a" is -calculated, the value of "a" will reflect the new value of "b", because the -symbolic constant contains just the text of the expression. - There is one more special case - when preprocessor goes to checking the -second symbol in the line and it happens to be the colon character (what is -then interpreted by assembler as definition of a label), it stops in this -place and finishes the preprocessing of the first symbol (so if it's the -symbolic constant it gets unrolled) and if it still appears to be the label, -it performs the standard preprocessing starting from the place after the -label. This allows to place preprocessor directives and macroinstructions -after the labels, analogously to the instructions and directives processed -by assembler, like: - - start: include 'start.inc' - -However if the label becomes broken during preprocessing (for example when -it is the symbolic constant with empty value), only replacing of the symbolic -constants is continued for the rest of line. - It should be remembered, that the jobs performed by preprocessor are the -preliminary operations on the texts symbols, that are done in a simple -single pass before the main process of assembly. The text that is the -result of preprocessing is passed to assembler, and it then does its -multiple passes on it. Thus the control directives, which are recognized and -processed only by the assembler - as they are dependent on the numerical -values that may even vary between passes - are not recognized in any way by -the preprocessor and have no effect on the preprocessing. Consider this -example source: - - if 0 - a = 1 - b equ 2 - end if - dd b - -When it is preprocessed, they only directive that is recognized by the -preprocessor is the "equ", which defines symbolic constant "b", so later -in the source the "b" symbol is replaced with the value "2". Except for this -replacement, the other lines are passes unchanged to the assembler. So -after preprocessing the above source becomes: - - if 0 - a = 1 - end if - dd 2 - -Now when assembler processes it, the condition for the "if" is false, and -the "a" constant doesn't get defined. However symbolic constant "b" was -processed normally, even though its definition was put just next to the one -of "a". So because of the possible confusion you should be very careful -every time when mixing the features of preprocessor and assembler - in such -cases it is important to realize what the source will become after the -preprocessing, and thus what the assembler will see and do its multiple passes -on. - - -2.4 Formatter directives - -These directives are actually also a kind of control directives, with the -purpose of controlling the format of generated code. - "format" directive followed by the format identifier allows to select the -output format. This directive should be put at the beginning of the source. -Default output format is a flat binary file, it can also be selected by using -"format binary" directive. This directive can be followed by the "as" keyword -and the quoted string specifying the default file extension for the output -file. Unless the output file name was specified from the command line, -assembler will use this extension when generating the output file. - "use16" and "use32" directives force the assembler to generate 16-bit or -32-bit code, omitting the default setting for selected output format. "use64" -enables generating the code for the long mode of x86-64 processors. - Below are described different output formats with the directives specific to -these formats. - - -2.4.1 MZ executable - -To select the MZ output format, use "format MZ" directive. The default code -setting for this format is 16-bit. - "segment" directive defines a new segment, it should be followed by label, -which value will be the number of defined segment, optionally "use16" or -"use32" word can follow to specify whether code in this segment should be -16-bit or 32-bit. The origin of segment is aligned to paragraph (16 bytes). -All the labels defined then will have values relative to the beginning of this -segment. - "entry" directive sets the entry point for MZ executable, it should be -followed by the far address (name of segment, colon and the offset inside -segment) of desired entry point. - "stack" directive sets up the stack for MZ executable. It can be followed by -numerical expression specifying the size of stack to be created automatically -or by the far address of initial stack frame when you want to set up the stack -manually. When no stack is defined, the stack of default size 4096 bytes will -be created. - "heap" directive should be followed by a 16-bit value defining maximum size -of additional heap in paragraphs (this is heap in addition to stack and -undefined data). Use "heap 0" to always allocate only memory program really -needs. Default size of heap is 65535. - - -2.4.2 Portable Executable - -To select the Portable Executable output format, use "format PE" directive, it -can be followed by additional format settings: first the target subsystem -setting, which can be "console" or "GUI" for Windows applications, "native" -for Windows drivers, "EFI", "EFIboot" or "EFIruntime" for the UEFI, it may be -followed by the minimum version of system that the executable is targeted to -(specified in form of floating-point value). Optional "DLL" and "WDM" keywords -mark the output file as a dynamic link library and WDM driver respectively, -and the "large" keyword marks the executable as able to handle addresses -larger than 2 GB. - After those settings can follow the "at" operator and a numerical expression -specifying the base of PE image and then optionally "on" operator followed by -the quoted string containing file name selects custom MZ stub for PE program -(when specified file is not a MZ executable, it is treated as a flat binary -executable file and converted into MZ format). The default code setting for -this format is 32-bit. The example of fully featured PE format declaration: - - format PE GUI 4.0 DLL at 7000000h on 'stub.exe' - - To create PE file for the x86-64 architecture, use "PE64" keyword instead of -"PE" in the format declaration, in such case the long mode code is generated -by default. - "section" directive defines a new section, it should be followed by quoted -string defining the name of section, then one or more section flags can -follow. Available flags are: "code", "data", "readable", "writeable", -"executable", "shareable", "discardable", "notpageable". The origin of section -is aligned to page (4096 bytes). Example declaration of PE section: - - section '.text' code readable executable - -Among with flags also one of the special PE data identifiers can be specified -to mark the whole section as a special data, possible identifiers are -"export", "import", "resource" and "fixups". If the section is marked to -contain fixups, they are generated automatically and no more data needs to be -defined in this section. Also resource data can be generated automatically -from the resource file, it can be achieved by writing the "from" operator and -quoted file name after the "resource" identifier. Below are the examples of -sections containing some special PE data: - - section '.reloc' data discardable fixups - section '.rsrc' data readable resource from 'my.res' - - "entry" directive sets the entry point for Portable Executable, the value of -entry point should follow. - "stack" directive sets up the size of stack for Portable Executable, value -of stack reserve size should follow, optionally value of stack commit -separated with comma can follow. When stack is not defined, it's set by -default to size of 4096 bytes. - "heap" directive chooses the size of heap for Portable Executable, value of -heap reserve size should follow, optionally value of heap commit separated -with comma can follow. When no heap is defined, it is set by default to size -of 65536 bytes, when size of heap commit is unspecified, it is by default set -to zero. - "data" directive begins the definition of special PE data, it should be -followed by one of the data identifiers ("export", "import", "resource" or -"fixups") or by the number of data entry in PE header. The data should be -defined in next lines, ended with "end data" directive. When fixups data -definition is chosen, they are generated automatically and no more data needs -to be defined there. The same applies to the resource data when the "resource" -identifier is followed by "from" operator and quoted file name - in such case -data is taken from the given resource file. - The "rva" operator can be used inside the numerical expressions to obtain -the RVA of the item addressed by the value it is applied to, that is the -offset relative to the base of PE image. - - -2.4.3 Common Object File Format - -To select Common Object File Format, use "format COFF" or "format MS COFF" -directive, depending whether you want to create classic (DJGPP) or Microsoft's -variant of COFF file. The default code setting for this format is 32-bit. To -create the file in Microsoft's COFF format for the x86-64 architecture, use -"format MS64 COFF" setting, in such case long mode code is generated by -default. - "section" directive defines a new section, it should be followed by quoted -string defining the name of section, then one or more section flags can -follow. Section flags available for both COFF variants are "code" and "data", -while flags "readable", "writeable", "executable", "shareable", "discardable", -"notpageable", "linkremove" and "linkinfo" are available only with Microsoft's -COFF variant. - By default section is aligned to double word (four bytes), in case of -Microsoft COFF variant other alignment can be specified by providing the -"align" operator followed by alignment value (any power of two up to 8192) -among the section flags. - "extrn" directive defines the external symbol, it should be followed by the -name of symbol and optionally the size operator specifying the size of data -labeled by this symbol. The name of symbol can be also preceded by quoted -string containing name of the external symbol and the "as" operator. -Some example declarations of external symbols: - - extrn exit - extrn '__imp__MessageBoxA@16' as MessageBox:dword - - "public" directive declares the existing symbol as public, it should be -followed by the name of symbol, optionally it can be followed by the "as" -operator and the quoted string containing name under which symbol should be -available as public. Some examples of public symbols declarations: - - public main - public start as '_start' - -Additionally, with COFF format it's possible to specify exported symbol as -static, it's done by preceding the name of symbol with the "static" keyword. - When using the Microsoft's COFF format, the "rva" operator can be used -inside the numerical expressions to obtain the RVA of the item addressed by the -value it is applied to. - -2.4.4 Executable and Linkable Format - -To select ELF output format, use "format ELF" directive. The default code -setting for this format is 32-bit. To create ELF file for the x86-64 -architecture, use "format ELF64" directive, in such case the long mode code is -generated by default. - "section" directive defines a new section, it should be followed by quoted -string defining the name of section, then can follow one or both of the -"executable" and "writeable" flags, optionally also "align" operator followed -by the number specifying the alignment of section (it has to be the power of -two), if no alignment is specified, the default value is used, which is 4 or 8, -depending on which format variant has been chosen. - "extrn" and "public" directives have the same meaning and syntax as when the -COFF output format is selected (described in previous section). - The "rva" operator can be used also in the case of this format (however not -when target architecture is x86-64), it converts the address into the offset -relative to the GOT table, so it may be useful to create position-independent -code. There's also a special "plt" operator, which allows to call the external -functions through the Procedure Linkage Table. You can even create an alias -for external function that will make it always be called through PLT, with -the code like: - - extrn 'printf' as _printf - printf = PLT _printf - - To create executable file, follow the format choice directive with the -"executable" keyword and optionally the number specifying the brand of the -target operating system (for example value 3 would mark the executable -for Linux system). With this format selected it is allowed to use "entry" -directive followed by the value to set as entry point of program. On the other -hand it makes "extrn" and "public" directives unavailable, and instead of -"section" there should be the "segment" directive used, followed by one or -more segment permission flags and optionally a marker of special ELF -executable segment, which can be "interpreter", "dynamic" or "note". The -origin of segment is aligned to page (4096 bytes), and available permission -flags are: "readable", "writeable" and "executable". - -EOF diff --git a/data/new-stack/docs/HOT_KEYS.TXT b/data/new-stack/docs/HOT_KEYS.TXT deleted file mode 100644 index 993775ba96..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/docs/HOT_KEYS.TXT +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -The following "hot" shortcut keys are used in the system: -(Indexing on time of appearance in the system) -1) Ctrl + Alt + Del start of the application CPU (the manager of processes), is a sole combination maintained on a level of a kernel, all rest "hot" key is realized at the expense of the application @PANEL. -2) Ctrl + Shift - switching of keyboard layout. -3) Win - start of the application MENU. -4) Alt + Ctrl + F12 - start of the application END. -5) Alt + F4 - terminate the active application. -6) Alt + Tab - switch to the next (in the window stack) window -7) Alt + Shift + Tab - switch to the previous (in the window stack) window -8) Alt + Shift + NumLock - start of the application MOUSEMUL, which emulates mouse with numpad, when NumLock is on. -9) Alt + 1...7 - fast switching to the selected keyboard layout (even if absent for Ctrl + Shift) -10) Win + D - minimize/restore all windows (cleaning of desktop) -11) Win + R - start of the application RUN -12) Alt + Ctrl + ArrowLeft - to scroll back a list of the taskbar -13) Alt + Ctrl + ArrowRight - to scroll forward a list of the taskbar -14) PrintScreen - start of the application SCRSHOOT. Just do a screen shot and the user is offered to specify (with OpenDialog) where to save the BMP image. diff --git a/data/new-stack/docs/INI.TXT b/data/new-stack/docs/INI.TXT deleted file mode 100644 index f906363c7e..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/docs/INI.TXT +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -Ini-files are text files of special contents: - -[name of first section] -Key1=value1 -Key2=value2 -;comment -[name of second section] -Key3=value3 - -All lines beginning with ';' are considered as comments and ignored. - -Keyboard shortcuts are described as follows: -any number of modificators Ctrl/Alt/Shift/LCtrl/LAlt/LShift/RCtrl/RAlt/RShift, -followed by latin letter, digit or key name. The following keys have a name: -F1 - F12 -Home; End; PgUp; PgDn; Ins, equivalently, Insert; Del, equivalently, Delete; -Tab; Plus; Esc; Enter; Backspace; Space; -Left (left arrow); Right (right arrow); Up (up arrow); Down (down arrow). -The string for shortcut is case-insensitive. Parts of the string -can be written without delimiters or with '+' between parts. Examples: -Ctrl+Alt+Backspace -RCtrl+RShift -ShiftA -f10 -shiftalt5 diff --git a/data/new-stack/docs/KFAR_KEYS.TXT b/data/new-stack/docs/KFAR_KEYS.TXT deleted file mode 100644 index d21d24ce41..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/docs/KFAR_KEYS.TXT +++ /dev/null @@ -1,94 +0,0 @@ -Control keys in KFar. -For panels: -arrows, Home, End - move cursor on active panel -Tab - change active panel -Enter - enter to folder or run program under cursor -F3 - view file under cursor -F5 - copy selected items or item under cursor to another panel -Shift+F5 - copy selected items or item under cursor to the same panel - (of course, you must specify another file name) -F7 - create folder -F8 - delete selected elements or element under cursor -F10 - exit -Alt+F1/Alt+F2 - change drive on left/right panel -Alt+F9 - resize window to maximum possible size and restore initial size -Ctrl+F3 - sort file/folders on active panel by name -Ctrl+F4 - sort by extension -Ctrl+F5 - sort by date/time of last modification -Ctrl+F6 - sort by size -Ctrl+F7 - don't sort (display in order as on disk) -Ctrl+F8 - sort by date/time of creation -Ctrl+F9 - sort by date/time of last access -F12 - display screens menu -Ctrl+R - refresh active panel -Menu - display context menu for file under cursor -LeftCtrl+1/2/3/4 - select panel mode (brief/medium/full/wide) -RightCtrl+0..9 - go to folder specified in the section [FolderShortcuts] - of ini-file as Shortcut0..9 accordingly -Insert - select/deselect current element -Grey[+] - select files and folders with mask -Grey[-] - deselect files and folders with mask -The mask is like "*.asm,*.inc|template.asm" (which selects all files with -extensions ASM and INC except for template.asm): one or more elementary -including masks with standard mean of '*' and '?', delimited by ',' or ';', -optionally followed by '|' and one or more elementary excluding masks. -The mask "*.*" specifies all files having '.' in name (i.e. files with -any non-empty extension); to specify all files use "*". -Grey[*] - invert selection -Alt+ - position cursor on name of file/folder, -beginning from selected letter or digit; it shows fast find window, -in which one can enter subsequent symbols of file/folder name to more precise -selection, and also Ctrl+Enter/Shift+Ctrl+Enter to move to the next/previous -panel item, whose name starts with specified letters - -For viewer: -Esc = F3 = F10 = Numpad5 - exit -Down - line down -PgDn - page down -Up - line up -PgUp - page up -Home - to begin of file -End - to end of file -Left - character left -Right - character right -Ctrl+Left - in Text-mode 20 characters left; - in Hex-mode 1 byte left -Ctrl+Right - in Text-mode 20 characters right; - in Hex-mode 1 byte right -Ctrl+Shift+Left - start of lines on the screen -Ctrl+Shift+Right - end of lines on the screen -F2 - toggle line wrap -F4 - toggle Text <-> Hex mode -F8 - toggle encoding cp866 (DOS) <-> cp1251 (Win) -Shift+F8 - encoding tables menu -F12 - display screens menu -F7 - search a string from the current position in the file - (the string and settings are set in the following dialog) -Shift+F7 - continue to search a string - (use the string and settings from last search by F7) -Alt+F9 - resize window to maximum possible size and restore initial size - -For editor: -Esc = F10 - exit; if the file was modified, the question about save necessity - will follow -Shift+F10 - save and exit -F2 - save the file -Down - move cursor down to one line -PgDn - move cursor down to one page -Up - move cursor up to one line -PgUp - move cursor up to one page -Left - move cursor left to one symbol -Right - move cursor right to one symbol -Home - move cursor to the beginning of the current line -End - move cursor to the end of the current line -Backspace - delete the symbol before the cursor -Del - delete the symbol under the cursor -Ins - toggle insert/replace mode when entering symbols -F12 - display screens menu -Alt+F9 - resize window to maximum possible size and restore initial size -F7 - search a string starting from the position next to the cursor - (the string and search settings are prompted in the following dialog) -Shift+F7 - continue to search a string (same as F7 without settings dialog) - - diamond - mailto:diamondz@land.ru diff --git a/data/new-stack/docs/MTDBG.TXT b/data/new-stack/docs/MTDBG.TXT deleted file mode 100644 index 52bbcd90c6..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/docs/MTDBG.TXT +++ /dev/null @@ -1,212 +0,0 @@ -Introduction. - -mtdbg is a debugger for Kolibri operating system. This documentation describes -debugger features and work with it. Feel free to ask on our board (mostly -in Russian, but has an English forum) -- board.kolibrios.org. - -General description. - -In each moment of time mtdbg can debug only one program. I will call it -loaded program. If no program is loaded, overwhelming majority of debugging -actions is disabled. - -mtdbg is controlled by command line, entering from keyboard. Command line -is drawn in the bottom part of debugger window. Debugger handles standard -input keys Backspace,Delete,Home,End,left/right arrows. -Commands are case-insensitive. Delimiter is arbitrary nonzero number of spaces. - -At any moment mtdbg can be terminated by command "quit" (without arguments). -You can also simply press to close button in the right upper corner of window. - -When debugger is started without command string parameters, no program is -loaded. Also mtdbg can be started with command string, in this case it tries -to load program with the name pointed to in first parameter in command string -and parameters pointed to following (if present). - -If no program is loaded, you can load a program with the command -load [] -Examples: -load /rd/1/example -LOAD /rd/1/aclock w200 h200 - LoaD /hd0/1/menuetos/dosbox/dosbox -All that stays after first space after executable file name, is exactly passed -to program as command string. -The command "load" reports result in the messages window (a little higher -than command line window). If program was loaded successfully, there will -be the appropriate message; otherwise the message will contain error reason. -Most probable error is "file not found" if wrong file name is given. - -The debugger can load files with information on symbols in the program -(labels, global variables) - text files, each line of which has format -0x -(lines, which do not have such format, are ignored). Such file can be created -by hand or generated automatically by fasm. Evident load can be done by command -load-symbols -Furthermore, when the debugger executes the command "load", it checks for -presence of file with name as of loading binary and extension '.dbg' -(/rd/1/example.dbg in the first of examples above), and if such file exists, -the debugger loads it automatically (with the message "Symbols loaded", if -all is OK). - -It can happen so that loaded program is packed. General principle of -program packing is following: at first input file is packed (by some -pack algorithm), then is appended small code which gets control at program -start, unpacks input code in the memory and then passes control to it. -If program is packed, it "real" code is not visible and for debugging it is -needed previously to pass through unpacker code. -mtdbg determines most of existing packers (mxp,mxp_lzo,mxp_nrv,mtappack) -and in this case suggests to automatically go to "real" code. It is recommended -to accept (press 'y' or ), but you can refuse too. At refusal and if -program is packed by something unknown the command "unpack" (without arguments) -can be used. Call it only in the case when you are sure that program is packed -and control has not already went to main code! [Starting from Kolibri 0.6.5.0, -this paragraph is no more actual, because one can pack applications as all -binary files with kpack and the unpacker code in this case is located in the -kernel and is transparent for debug.] - -Loaded program can be terminated by the command "terminate" (without -arguments). The command "detach" (without arguments) detaches from program, -after that program continues execution normally, as if there was no debugger. -After both this commands program stops to be debugged. - -It is possible to anew load program for debugging by the command "reload" -(without arguments). If there is already loaded program, it is terminated -and new instance is started (from the beginning) (with the same command -string), in this case the command is similar to the commands -terminate -load -Otherwise is loaded anew latest program, which was debugged (in the current -seance of work with mtdbg) (with the same command string), i.e. is similar to -load , -but the command "reload" in both cases is shorter and more convenient; -moreover, "load" thinks that new program is loaded and moves data window -(see below) to zero address, and "reload" keeps current address. - -The command "help", which can be shorten to "h", is always available. -All commands are divided on groups. -"help" without arguments displays the list of command groups. -"help" with group name displays the list of commands in this group with short -comments. -"help" with command name displays information about given command. -Examples: -help -help control -h LoaD - -The debugger window consists from the following items enumerated from up -to down: -- status string. If there is loaded program, shows its name and state - ("Running/Paused"), otherwise reports "No program loaded". -- registers window - shows values of general-purpose registers, register eip - and states of single flags: CF,PF,AF,ZF,SF,DF,OF: if flag is cleared, then - is displayed lower-case letter, if flag is set, then upper-case one. - Registers which are changed from previous moment are highlighted in green. -- data window (dump window) - shows memory contains of loaded program -- code window (disassembler window) - shows program code as disassembled - instructions -- messages window -- command line window - -Dump window can display data starting from any address, to this serves -the command -d -The command "d" without arguments flicks dump window down. -The same is for code window and the command -u -or simply "u". -Examples: -d esi - displays data at address esi (e.g. is useful before execution of - instruction rep movsb) -d esp - displays stack -u eip - disassembles instruction starting from the current - -Expressions in mtdbg can include -- hexadecimal constants -- names of all general-purpose registers (8 32-bits, 8 16-bits and - 8 8-bits) and register eip; values of 16- and 8-bits registers are padded - with zeroes to 32 bits -- four arithmetic operations +,-,*,/ (with standard priorities) and - brackets -- [if symbols information was loaded] names, loaded from dbg-file -All calculations are realized modulo 2^32. -Examples of expressions: -eax -eip+2 -ecx-esi-1F -al+AH*bl -ax + 2* bH*(eip+a73) -3*esi*di/EAX -The command -? -calculates value of specified expression. - -Values of registers in loaded program can be changed by the command "r", which -has two absolutely equivalent forms: -r -r = -(in both cases you can place spaces as you want). Register can be any of -above-mentioned - 24 general-purpose registers and eip. - - -Let us assume that the command "load" was successfully load program for -debugging. -Immediately after loading program is suspended and does not execute. -Press Ctrl+F7 (command-line analog is the command "s") to make one step -in loaded program, after that control returns to debugger which displays -new contains of registers and memory. The system call "int 40h" is considered -as one step. -Pressing Ctrl+F8 (command-line analog is the command "p") also makes step in -loaded program, but procedure calls, string operations with prefix -rep/repz/repnz and 'loop' cycles are executed as one step. -The one-step commands are used usually on single program sections, -when it is needed, for example, to regularly trace registers value and/or -some variables in memory. -The command -g -resumes program execution and waits until control goes to eip=given address, -and in this moment suspends program. The command "g" without arguments -simply resumes execution. - -To suspend program use the command "stop" (without arguments). - -In the typical situation it is required that program is executed normally, -but when some conditions are satisfied, program suspends and debugger receives -control. The corresponding conditions are called breakpoints or simply breaks. -Primary type of breakpoints is to concrete address, i.e. stop execution at -eip=. Such breakpoints are set by the command -bp -Note that if there is only one such breakpoint, there is more convenient to use -the command "g" with argument instead. - -Other type of breakpoints is on access to given memory area. Maximum -numbers of such breakpoints is 4 (because hardware features of x86 processors -are used and they allows only 4). -bpm - breaks at any access to byte at given address -bpm w - breaks at write to byte at given address -bpmb,bpmw,bpmd - breaks to access correspondingly to byte, word -or dword at given address. bpm ¨ bpmb are synonyms. When bpmw,bpmd are used, -address must be aligned according to correspondingly word bound (i.e. be even) -or dword bound (i.e. be divisible by 4). -bpmb,bpmw,bpmd w - similar to break on write. - -To see the list of set breakpoints use the command "bl", to obtain information -on concrete breakpoint use "bl ". Unnecessary breakpoints can be -deleted with the command "bc ", temporarily unnecessary can be -disabled by the command "bd ", when they will be needed again, -use the command "be ". - -Remarks. - -1. When debugging your own programs you can put in code instructions - int3 (pay attention to absence of space!). Such instruction causes - exception at normal run, which leads to process termination, but - at work under debugger it is simply activated (with the message - "int3 command at xxx"). This feature allows to not think about addresses - to use in the commands g and/or bp. -2. All output and all input is oriented on hexadecimal scale of notation. -3. When program is executed, registers and data window shows information - regarding to moment before resume; you can not set registers value in this - mode. Nevertheless the command "d" in this mode shows information that - was true in the moment of command delivery. - - diamond diff --git a/data/new-stack/docs/README.TXT b/data/new-stack/docs/README.TXT deleted file mode 100644 index d8d770e76c..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/docs/README.TXT +++ /dev/null @@ -1,268 +0,0 @@ - ************************ - * Kolibri OS 0.7.7.0+ * - * February 2010 * - ************************ - - The latest release of the OS is available on the official site: - http://kolibrios.org - - If you have questions - look for support on our forum: - http://board.kolibrios.org (rus+eng) - - *********************************** - * What is new in this release? * - *********************************** - - The following changes, revisions, fixes in the kernel have been made: - - From Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond) - Russian Federation - 1) Improvement of drives detection using BIOS service (V86) - 2) Kernel bugfixes. - - From Sergey Semyonov (Serge) - Russian Federation - 1) Driver for ATI videocards updated. - 2) Linux-like kernel mutexes - - From Mihail Semenyako (mike.dld) - Republic of Belarus - 1) Refactoring of window subsystem. - - From - 1) Processing API functions in order to completely remove the shift-register-call - 2) Refactoring, optimization, bugfixes of some places in the kernel. - - From A.Jerdev (art_zh) - United Kingdom - 1) Memory-mapped I/O (MMIO) access from the userworld. - 2) PCIe Extended configuration space access (auto-adjust for AMD-NPT since Athlon64). - - From turbanoff - 1) Read from ext2fs/ext3fs. - - From Marat Zakiyanov (Mario79) - Russian Federation - 1) Improvements in the processing of mouse clicks. - - From hidnplayr - 1) Rewriting of the entire network subsystem. - - From Asper - 1) Drivers for the sound cards VT823(X) and EMU10K1X. - - From tsdima - 1) Driver for the sound card ForteMedia fm801. - - From Maxis - 1) changes in free memory checks. - - - - - - The following changes, revisions, fixes in applications have been made: - - * New versions of applications and new applications: - - FTPS - tsdima, some improvements - VIEW3DS - macgub, version 0.054 - FASM - Pavel Rymovski (Heavyiron), updated to version 1.69.11 - IgorA, use the library box_lib, russification, - Marat Zakiyanov (Mario79) fix bugs encountered - Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond), fix of window wrapping - PCIDEV - art_zh, MMIO sample dumps added; vendors database - trimmed to reduce the distro size. - BOARD - Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond), do not throw out existing - messages at the program start - UNVWATER - Asper, demo ported from OctaOS - (the author is Octavio Vega Fernandez). - HEED - staper, version 0.14: use the library box_lib; - Ctrl+C/X/V, Ctrl+B to select a block - Marat Zakiyanov (Mario79), using of OpenDialog component, - little optimization of the code - SHELL - Albom, version 0.4.2 - CPU - Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond) at the suggestion of - Kirill Lipatov (Leency), do not show system processes - by default - HTMLV - Kirill Lipatov (Leency), version 0.62a - EOLITE - Kirill Lipatov (Leency), version 0.98.7a - RTFREAD - Sorcerer, cosmetic fix - dunkaist, menu_bar and scroll_bar from box_lib, 'end' hotkey - E80 - Albom, version 0.5.1 - KIV - Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond), file name in the window - title, configurable keyboard shortcuts for next/prev - images in the current folder - SUDOKU - staper, port of Sudoku game - that is a puzzle with digits, where you - have to fill free cells with digits from 1 to 9 so that every row, - every column and every small square 3x3 contain each digit just one time. - There are 9 levels in the game. - REVERSI - staper, port of strategy game Reversi (Othello) - MSQUARE - staper, math puzzle "magic square": sum of the numbers in rows, columns - (less often in diagonals) should be equal - FINDN-S - Artemonische, a simple game in which you have to collect all the numbers - in the order of 10 to 90 - PANEL - Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond), a little change in the panel clock - and reanimation of backlight on the Alt+[Shift+]Tab press. - AC97SND - Asper, support of playlists in m3u format. - @NOTIFY - SoUrcerer, program for popup text messages - DOSBOX - Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond), version 0.74 - ASCIIVJU - Konstantin Dutkevich (Nazarus), program shows ASCII table - PIPETKA - Rock_maniak_forever, program to get color of a pixel on the screen - SNAKE - dunkaist, yet another implementation of classic game - - - - - * New versions of dynamic libraries and new dynamic libraries: - libini - Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond), added function to read - keyboard shortcuts - box_lib - IgorA, update component tree_list, new component - text_editor, documentation on the library - Marat Zakiyanov (Mario79) refinement of ŽpenDialog component, rewriting - of some applications to use it, new component PathShow - - - -/-----------------------------------------------\ -* Dates of publication of the distribution kits * -\-----------------------------------------------/ - -RE N1 30.08.2003 -RE N2 07.10.2003 -RE N3 26.11.2003 -RE N4 23.12.2003 -RE N5 15.02.2004 -RE N6 27.03.2004 -KOLIBRI N1 16.05.2004 -RE N7 11.06.2004 -KOLIBRI N2 28.08.2004 -RE N8 01.12.2004 -KOLIBRI N3 22.02.2005 - Beta 2: 20.03.2005 -KOLIBRI N4 07.06.2005 -KOLIBRI 0.5.0.0 04.10.2005 - 0.5.1.0 12.10.2005 - 0.5.2.0 02.12.2005 - 0.5.3.0 18.03.2006 - 0.5.8.0 09.07.2006 - 0.5.8.1 25.07.2006 - - 0.6.0.0 04.09.2006 - 0.6.3.0 31.10.2006 - 0.6.5.0 14.02.2007 - - 0.7.0.0 07.06.2007 - 0.7.1.0 23.09.2007 - 0.7.5.0 31.01.2009 - 0.7.7.0 13.12.2009 - -/----------------\ -* KolibriOS TEAM * -\----------------/ - -This list contains all, who has actively helped to creation and development -of KolibriOS, whoever possible. - (people are enumerated in the order by time of participation in the project, - from bottom to top - from past to future, through present) - -* Trans \ -* VaStaNi | -* Ivan Poddubny | -* Marat Zakiyanov (Mario79) | -* Mihail Semenyako (mike.dld) | system programming -* Sergey Kuzmin (Wildwest) | -* Andrey Halyavin (halyavin) | loaders, -* Mihail Lisovin (Mihasik) | kernel improvements and so on -* Andrey Ignatiev (andrew_programmer) | -* NoName | -* Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond) | -* Iliya Mihailov (Ghost) | -* Sergey Semyonov (Serge) | -* Johnny_B | -* kasTIgar | -* SPraid | -* Rus | -* Alver | -* Maxis | -* Galkov | -* CleverMouse | -* tsdima | -* turbanoff | -* Asper | -* art_zh / - -* Mihail Lisovin (Mihasik) \ -* Andrey Ivushkin (Willow) | -* Mihail Semenyako (mike.dld) | -* Pavlushin Evgeny (Exis) | -* Ivan Poddubny | application programming -* Marat Zakiyanov (Mario79) | -* Sergey Kuzmin (Wildwest) | -* Andrey Halyavin (halyavin) | creation of new, -* Hex | port of existing -* Andrey Ignatiev (andrew_programmer) | or revisions of old -* ealex | applications for Kolibri -* Olaf | -* Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond) | -* Navanax | -* Johnny_B | -* Pavel Rymovski (Heavyiron) | -* Vitaly Bendik (mistifi(ator) | -* Iliya Mihailov (Ghost) | -* Maxim Evtihov (Maxxxx32) | -* Vladimir Zaitsev (Rabid Rabbit) | -* vectoroc | -* Alexey Teplov () | -* Sergey Semyonov (Serge) | -* YELLOW | -* iadn | -* Maciej Guba (macgub) | -* Mario Birkner (cYfleXX) | -* hidden player (hidnplayr) | -* trolly | -* nilgui | -* kaitz | -* DedOk | -* SPraid | -* Rus | -* Alver | -* Dron2004 | -* Gluk | -* Aleksandr Bogomaz (Albom) | -* Kirill Lipatov (Leency) | -* Vasiliy Kosenko (vkos) | -* IgorA | -* staper | -* chaykin | -* Alexander Meshcheryakov | - (Self-Perfection) | -* CleverMouse | -* tsdima | -* art_zh | -* Asper | -* Pterox | -* Artemonische | -* dunkaist / - -* Hex \ -* Diamond / documentation - -* CodeWorld \ forum http://meos.sysbin.com -* mike.dld / site http://kolibrios.org; svn-server - -* Alexey Teplov () \ (KolibriOS logo) -* goglus | design (KolibriOS background) -* Kirill Lipatov (Leency) / (KolibriOS icons) - -* Pavel Rymovski (Heavyiron) \ -* Vitaly Bendik (mistifi(ator) | -* vectoroc | -* Veliant | testing, -* AqwAS | countenance -* Mike | -* camper | -* Dmitry the Sorcerer | -* Ataualpa | -* Maxis | -* Galkov | -* ChE / - -and others... - - KolibriOS team diff --git a/data/new-stack/docs/STACK.TXT b/data/new-stack/docs/STACK.TXT deleted file mode 100644 index 645f6ef488..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/docs/STACK.TXT +++ /dev/null @@ -1,203 +0,0 @@ -eax = 74 - Work directly with network interface -ebx = -1 (Get number of active network devices) - - out: - eax = number of active network devices - -bh = device number, for all following functions ! - -bl = 0 (Get device type) - - out: - eax = device type number - -bl = 1 (Get device name) - - in: - ecx = pointer to 64 byte buffer - out: - name is copied into the buffer - eax = -1 on error - -bl = 2 (Reset the device) - - in - none - out - eax = -1 on error - -bl = 3 (Stop device) - - in - none - out - eax = -1 on error - -TO BE FIGURED OUT - -eax = 75 - Work with Sockets - -These functions work like the ones found in UNIX (and windows) -for more info, please read http://beej.us/guide/bgnet/ - -bl = 0 (Open Socket) - - in: - ecx = domain - edx = type - esi = protocol - out: - eax = socket number, -1 on error - -bl = 1 (Close Socket) - - in: - ecx = socket number - out: - eax = -1 on error - -bl = 2 (Bind) - - in: - ecx = socket number - edx = pointer to sockaddr structure - esi = length of sockaddr structure - out: - eax = -1 on error - -bl = 3 (Listen) - - in: - ecx = socket number - edx = backlog - out: - eax = -1 on error - -bl = 4 (connect) - - in: - ecx = socket number - edx = pointer to sockaddr structure - esi = length of sockaddr structure - out: - eax = -1 on error - -bl = 5 (accept) - - in: - ecx = socket number - edx = pointer to sockaddr structure - esi = length of sockaddr structure - out: - eax = socket number, -1 on error - -bl = 6 (send) - - in: - ecx = socket number - edx = pointer to buffer - esi = length of buffer - edi = flags - out: - eax = -1 on error - -bl = 7 (receive) - - in: - ecx = socket number - edx = pointer to buffer - esi = length of buffer - edi = flags - out: - eax = number of bytes copied, -1 on error - -bl = 8 (set socket options) - - in: - ecx = socket number - edx = level - esi = optionname - edi = ptr to buffer - -The buffer's first dword is the length of the buffer, minus the first dword offcourse - - out: - eax = -1 on error - -bl = 9 (get socket options - - in: - ecx = socket number - edx = level - esi = optionname - edi = ptr to buffer - -The buffer's first dword is the length of the buffer, minus the first dword offcourse - - out: - eax = -1 on error, socket option otherwise - -TIP - -when you import 'network.inc' and 'macros.inc' into your source code, you can use the following syntax to work with sockets: - - -for example, to open a socket - -mcall socket, AF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM,0 -mov [socketnum], eax - -then to connect to a server - -mcall connect, [socketnum], sockaddr, 18 - - -eax = 76 - Work with protocols - -high half of ebx = protocol number (for all subfunctions!) -bh = device number (for all subfunctions!) -bl = subfunction number, depends on protocol type - -For Ethernet protocol - -0 - Read # Packets send -1 - Read # Packets received -2 - Read # Bytes send -3 - Read # Bytes received -4 - Read MAC -5 - Write MAC -6 - Read IN-QUEUE size -7 - Read OUT-QUEUE size -For IPv4 protocol - -0 - Read # IP packets send -1 - Read # IP packets received -2 - Read IP -3 - Write IP -4 - Read DNS -5 - Write DNS -6 - Read subnet -7 - Write subnet -8 - Read gateway -9 - Write gateway -For ARP protocol - -0 - Read # ARP packets send -1 - Read # ARP packets received -2 - Get # ARP entry's -3 - Read ARP entry -4 - Add static ARP entry -5 - Remove ARP entry (-1 = remove all) -For ICMP protocol - -0 - Read # ICMP packets send -1 - Read # ICMP packets received -3 - enable/disable ICMP echo reply -For UDP protocol - -0 - Read # UDP packets send -1 - Read # UDP packets received -For TCP protocol - -0 - Read # TCP packets send -1 - Read # TCP packets received \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/new-stack/doexe2.asm b/data/new-stack/doexe2.asm deleted file mode 100644 index eaebd8aaf8..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/doexe2.asm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ -filename equ '%EXENAME%' - -virtual at 0 -file filename:3Ch,4 -load pehea dword from 0 -file filename:pehea,0F8h+28h*3 -load NumberOfSections word from 4+6 -load SizeOfOptionalHeader word from 4+14h -if NumberOfSections<>3 -error Expected three sections, .text, .bss and .reloc -end if -if SizeOfOptionalHeader<>0E0h -error Nonstandard PE header -end if -load RelocsRVA dword from 4+0A0h -load RelocsSize dword from 4+0A4h -load ImageBase dword from 4+34h -load TextRVA dword from 4+0F8h+0Ch -load TextSize dword from 4+0F8h+8 -load TextOffs dword from 4+0F8h+14h -load BSSSize dword from 4+0F8h+28h+10h -load RelocRVA dword from 4+0F8h+28h*2+0Ch -load RelocOffs dword from 4+0F8h+28h*2+14h -if BSSSize -error Second section expected to be .bss -end if -if RelocRVA<>RelocsRVA -error Third section expected to be .reloc -end if -;file 'test.exe':pehea+0F8h,28h -;load physofs dword from 4+14h -;load mem dword from 4+8 -;file 'test.exe':physofs+16,4 -;load sz dword from $-4 -end virtual - -file filename:TextOffs,TextSize - -while RelocsSize>8 -virtual at 0 -file filename:RelocOffs,8 -load CurRelocPage dword from 0 -load CurRelocChunkSize dword from 4 -end virtual -RelocsSize=RelocsSize-CurRelocChunkSize -CurRelocChunkSize = CurRelocChunkSize-8 -RelocOffs=RelocOffs+8 -while CurRelocChunkSize -virtual at 0 -file filename:RelocOffs,2 -RelocOffs=RelocOffs+2 -CurRelocChunkSize=CurRelocChunkSize-2 -load s word from 0 -end virtual -CurRelocType = s shr 12 -RelocItem = CurRelocPage + (s and 0xFFF) -if CurRelocType=0 -else if CurRelocType=3 -load z dword from RelocItem-TextRVA -store dword z-(TextRVA+ImageBase) at RelocItem-TextRVA -else -error Unexpected relocation type -end if -end while -end while - -store dword TextSize at 10h -store dword RelocRVA-TextRVA at 14h diff --git a/data/new-stack/fonts/char.mt b/data/new-stack/fonts/char.mt deleted file mode 100644 index e9b702604c..0000000000 Binary files a/data/new-stack/fonts/char.mt and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/new-stack/fonts/char2.mt b/data/new-stack/fonts/char2.mt deleted file mode 100644 index d275251663..0000000000 Binary files a/data/new-stack/fonts/char2.mt and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/new-stack/icons.dat b/data/new-stack/icons.dat deleted file mode 100644 index 523ef4135f..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/icons.dat +++ /dev/null @@ -1,13 +0,0 @@ -AA-FASM -010-/SYS/DEVELOP/FASM - * -AB-TINYPAD -009-/SYS/TINYPAD - * -BA-EOLITE -002-/SYS/File Managers/EOLITE - * -CA-SHELL -020-/SYS/SHELL - * -BB-KFAR -016-/SYS/File Managers/KFAR - * -AC-RDSAVE -017-/SYS/RDSAVE - * -BC-CALC -004-/SYS/CALC - * -CB-KFM -005-/SYS/File Managers/KFM - * -JA-HEXEDIT -010-/SYS/DEVELOP/HEED - * -IA-BOARD -019-/SYS/DEVELOP/BOARD - * -JC-DOCPACK -008-/SYS/DOCPACK - * -HA-MTDBG -006-/SYS/DEVELOP/MTDBG - * -IB-KPACK -010-/RD/1/KPACK - * diff --git a/data/new-stack/iconstrp.png b/data/new-stack/iconstrp.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6be55872a1..0000000000 Binary files a/data/new-stack/iconstrp.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/new-stack/index_htm b/data/new-stack/index_htm deleted file mode 100644 index c88fcc52bb..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/index_htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ - - - - - KolibriOS web server - default message - - -

Welcome to KolibriOS server

-

- If you can read this with an external html-browser then Kolibri - networking is correctly set up. -

This file: /rd/1/index.htm -

- - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/data/new-stack/kerpack b/data/new-stack/kerpack deleted file mode 100644 index 511e23d2da..0000000000 Binary files a/data/new-stack/kerpack and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/new-stack/keymap.key b/data/new-stack/keymap.key deleted file mode 100644 index f6f2a5d8a7..0000000000 Binary files a/data/new-stack/keymap.key and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/new-stack/lang.inc b/data/new-stack/lang.inc deleted file mode 100644 index dc151ef654..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/lang.inc +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -lang fix en \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/new-stack/lang.ini b/data/new-stack/lang.ini deleted file mode 100644 index c03a291d7d..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/lang.ini +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -[start] -startlng = 1 - -[comkey] -ccomkey1 = 1 -ccomkey2 = 4 -ccomkey3 = 7 - -[altkey] -altkey1 = 1 -altkey2 = 4 -altkey3 = 7 -altkey4 = 3 -altkey5 = 5 -altkey6 = 6 -altkey7 = 2 -altkey8 = 0 -altkey9 = 0 -altkey0 = 0 - -[langs] -1 = En -2 = Fi -3 = Ge -4 = Ru -5 = Fr -6 = Et -7 = Ua \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/new-stack/lib/msgbox.obj b/data/new-stack/lib/msgbox.obj deleted file mode 100644 index 655d3dee72..0000000000 Binary files a/data/new-stack/lib/msgbox.obj and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/new-stack/lib/pixlib.obj b/data/new-stack/lib/pixlib.obj deleted file mode 100644 index ca2e94a778..0000000000 Binary files a/data/new-stack/lib/pixlib.obj and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/new-stack/lib/sort.obj b/data/new-stack/lib/sort.obj deleted file mode 100644 index 063da99799..0000000000 Binary files a/data/new-stack/lib/sort.obj and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/new-stack/menu.dat b/data/new-stack/menu.dat deleted file mode 100644 index f95ab9f830..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/menu.dat +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ -#0 **** MAIN **** -Graphics > /@1 -Sound and music > /@2 -Development > /@3 -System > /@5 -Data processing > /@9 -Network > /@10 -Other > /@13 -Help /rd/1/docpack -Run application /rd/1/run -Shutdown /rd/1/end -#1 **** GRAPHICS **** -Image viewer /rd/1/media/kiv -Animage /rd/1/media/animage -#2 **** AUDIO **** -MidAMP /rd/1/media/midamp -CD player /rd/1/media/cdp -#3 **** PROGRAMMING **** -Examples > /@4 -Archiver KPack /rd/1/kpack -Flat Assembler /rd/1/develop/fasm -Debug Board /rd/1/develop/board -Debugger /rd/1/develop/mtdbg -Hex2Dec2Bin /rd/1/develop/h2d2b -ASCII-codes /rd/1/develop/keyascii -SCAN-codes /rd/1/develop/scancode -#4 **** EXAMPLES **** -Threads /rd/1/develop/thread -IPC /rd/1/develop/ipc -Color slider /rd/1/demos/cslide -Console example 1 /rd/1/develop/testcon2 -Console example 2 /rd/1/develop/test_gets -Message Boxes example /rd/1/demos/use_mb -#5 **** SYSTEM **** -Settings > /@6 -System sensors > /@7 -Work with files > /@8 -Testing > /@14 -Accessibility opt. > /@15 -Debug board /rd/1/develop/board -#6 **** SETTINGS **** -Devices /rd/1/setup -Background generator /rd/1/pic4 -Colors & Skin /rd/1/desktop -Icons manager /rd/1/icon -MyKey /rd/1/mykey -Video mode for ATI /rd/1/vmode -#7 **** SYSTEM SENSORS **** -Process manager /rd/1/cpu -PCI devices /rd/1/pcidev -Test graphics speed /rd/1/mgb -CPUID /rd/1/cpuid -Ghost Monitor /rd/1/gmon -K. Bus disconnected /rd/1/kbd -HDD informer /rd/1/hdd_info -Read HDD /rd/1/hdread -#8 **** WORK WITH FILES **** -KFAR /rd/1/File Managers/kfar -KFM /rd/1/File Managers/kfm -Eolite /rd/1/File Managers/Eolite -SHELL console /rd/1/shell -Save RD image /rd/1/rdsave -#9 **** DATA PROCESSING **** -Calculator /rd/1/calc -Tinypad /rd/1/tinypad -TextEdit /rd/1/develop/t_edit -Table Processor /rd/1/table -Graph builder /rd/1/graph -Hex-Editor /rd/1/develop/heed -#10 **** NET **** -Servers > /@11 -Clients > /@12 -Zero-Config /sys/network/zeroconf -network Config /sys/network/netcfg -Network status /sys/network/netstat -ARP status /sys/network/arpcfg -#11 **** SERVERS **** -FTP daemon /sys/network/ftpd -#12 **** CLIENTS **** -TFTP client /sys/network/tftpc -Ping /sys/network/ping -Telnet /sys/network/telnet -Synergy client /sys/network/synergyc -DNS lookup /sys/network/nslookup -#13 **** OTHER **** -Analogue clock /rd/1/demos/aclock -Binary clock /rd/1/demos/bcdclk -Timer /rd/1/demos/timer -ScrShoot /rd/1/scrshoot -Calendar /rd/1/calendar -RTF reader /rd/1/rtfread -#14 **** SYSTEM TESTS **** -Protection test /rd/1/test -Monitor test /rd/1/disptest -#15 **** SYSTEM SPECIAL **** -Screen magnifier /rd/1/magnify -Screen keyboard /rd/1/zkey -Character table /rd/1/ASCIIVju -## diff --git a/data/new-stack/network.ini b/data/new-stack/network.ini deleted file mode 100644 index 39b2aa5948..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/network.ini +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -[ipconfig] -; type should be static or zeroconf -; zeroconf means the service first tries to contact a DHCP server -; If dhcp is not available, it switches to link-local -type = zeroconf -ip = 10.0.2.15 -gateway = 10.0.2.2 -dns = 10.0.2.2 -subnet = 255.255.255.0 -[proxy] -; If Internet connection requires HTTP proxy, set it here -; and uncomment following lines: -;proxy = -;port = -; If proxy requires authentification, uncomment following lines too -; (otherwise, leave them commented): -;user = -;password= - diff --git a/data/new-stack/network/ftpd.ini b/data/new-stack/network/ftpd.ini deleted file mode 100644 index 216d00a2c4..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/network/ftpd.ini +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -[ftpd] -port=21 -conn=10 -ip=127.0.0.1 - -[pasv] -start=2000 -end=5000 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/new-stack/network/users.ini b/data/new-stack/network/users.ini deleted file mode 100644 index 85927c4354..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/network/users.ini +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -; Access modes -; -; List = 1 -; Read = 2 -; Write = 4 -; Delete = 8 -; Change directory = 16 - - -[anonymous] -; leavy pass empty to disable it -pass= -home=/rd/1/ -mode=3 - -[test] -pass=1234 -home=/rd/1/ -mode=31 - diff --git a/data/new-stack/panel.ini b/data/new-stack/panel.ini deleted file mode 100644 index 3454b9c21a..0000000000 --- a/data/new-stack/panel.ini +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -[Variables] -PanelHeight=24 -PanelWidth=0 -SoftenHeight=5 -ButtonTopOffset=4 -ButtonBottOffset=2 - -[Flags] -SoftenUp=1 -SoftenDown=0 -MinLeftButton=1 -MinRightButton=1 -MenuButton=1 -RunApplButtons=1 -ClnDesktButton=1 -Clock=1 -CpuUsage=1 -ChangeLang=1 -Attachment=1 -ButtonsStyle=1 - -[Colors] -MenuButton=0,100,0 -ClnDesktButton=0,128,255 -Clock=0,128,255 -CpuUsage=0,100,0 -CpuUsageBckgr=255,0,0 -ChangeLang=0,128,255 -PageList=255,255,255 -Text=255,255,255 -AltTab=255,128,0 - -[ApplicationsPaths] -End=/sys/END -Menu=/sys/@MENU -Run=/sys/RUN -PrnScr=/sys/SCRSHOOT -Clock=/sys/CALENDAR -CpuUsage=/sys/GMON -MouseEmul=/sys/MOUSEMUL diff --git a/data/new-stack/setup.dat b/data/new-stack/setup.dat deleted file mode 100644 index 1172ac3981..0000000000 Binary files a/data/new-stack/setup.dat and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/new-stack/vmode b/data/new-stack/vmode deleted file mode 100644 index 0c964ece6a..0000000000 Binary files a/data/new-stack/vmode and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/rus/network/jmail b/data/rus/network/jmail deleted file mode 100644 index c6091335c2..0000000000 Binary files a/data/rus/network/jmail and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/rus/network/zeroconf.ini b/data/rus/network/zeroconf.ini deleted file mode 100644 index 39b2aa5948..0000000000 --- a/data/rus/network/zeroconf.ini +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -[ipconfig] -; type should be static or zeroconf -; zeroconf means the service first tries to contact a DHCP server -; If dhcp is not available, it switches to link-local -type = zeroconf -ip = 10.0.2.15 -gateway = 10.0.2.2 -dns = 10.0.2.2 -subnet = 255.255.255.0 -[proxy] -; If Internet connection requires HTTP proxy, set it here -; and uncomment following lines: -;proxy = -;port = -; If proxy requires authentification, uncomment following lines too -; (otherwise, leave them commented): -;user = -;password= - diff --git a/data/sp/Makefile b/data/sp/Makefile index 8d5a890ffa..68f4153b04 100644 --- a/data/sp/Makefile +++ b/data/sp/Makefile @@ -103,7 +103,6 @@ FASM_PROGRAMS:=\ develop/fasm:DEVELOP/FASM:$(PROGS)/develop/fasm/trunk/fasm.asm \ develop/h2d2b:DEVELOP/H2D2B:$(PROGS)/develop/h2d2b/trunk/h2d2b.asm \ develop/heed:DEVELOP/HEED:$(PROGS)/develop/heed/trunk/heed.asm \ - develop/ipc:DEVELOP/IPC:$(PROGS)/network/ipc/trunk/ipc.asm \ develop/keyascii:DEVELOP/KEYASCII:$(PROGS)/develop/keyascii/trunk/keyascii.asm \ develop/mtdbg:DEVELOP/MTDBG:$(PROGS)/develop/mtdbg/mtdbg.asm \ develop/scancode:DEVELOP/SCANCODE:$(PROGS)/develop/scancode/trunk/scancode.asm \ @@ -133,6 +132,19 @@ FASM_PROGRAMS:=\ drivers/usbstor.obj:DRIVERS/USBSTOR.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/usbstor.asm \ drivers/vt823x.obj:DRIVERS/VT823X.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/vt823x.asm \ drivers/vidintel.obj:DRIVERS/VIDINTEL.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/vidintel.asm \ + drivers/3c59x.obj:DRIVERS/3C59X.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/3c59x.asm \ + drivers/dec21x4x.obj:DRIVERS/DEC21X4X.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/dec21x4x.asm \ + drivers/forcedeth.obj:DRIVERS/FORCEDETH.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/forcedeth.asm \ + drivers/i8254x.obj:DRIVERS/I8254X.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/i8254x.asm \ + drivers/i8255x.obj:DRIVERS/I8255X.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/i8255x.asm \ + drivers/mtd80x.obj:DRIVERS/MTD80X.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/mtd80x.asm \ + drivers/pcnet32.obj:DRIVERS/PCNET32.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/pcnet32.asm \ + drivers/r6040.obj:DRIVERS/R6040.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/R6040.asm \ + drivers/rhine.obj:DRIVERS/RHINE.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/rhine.asm \ + drivers/rtl8029.obj:DRIVERS/RTL8029.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/RTL8029.asm \ + drivers/rtl8139.obj:DRIVERS/RTL8139.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/RTL8139.asm \ + drivers/rtl8169.obj:DRIVERS/RTL8169.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/RTL8169.asm \ + drivers/sis900.obj:DRIVERS/SIS900.obj:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ethernet/sis900.asm \ File|Managers/kfar:File|Managers/KFAR:$(PROGS)/fs/kfar/trunk/kfar.asm \ File|Managers/kfm:File|Managers/KFM:$(PROGS)/fs/kfm/trunk/kfm.asm \ File|Managers/opendial:File|Managers/OPENDIAL:$(PROGS)/fs/opendial/opendial.asm \ @@ -175,23 +187,18 @@ FASM_PROGRAMS:=\ media/midamp:MEDIA/MIDAMP:$(PROGS)/media/midamp/trunk/midamp.asm \ media/palitra:MEDIA/PALITRA:$(PROGS)/media/palitra/trunk/palitra.asm \ media/startmus:MEDIA/STARTMUS:$(PROGS)/media/startmus/trunk/STARTMUS.ASM \ - network/airc:NETWORK/AIRC:$(PROGS)/network/airc/trunk/airc.asm \ - network/arpstat:NETWORK/ARPSTAT:$(PROGS)/network/arpstat/trunk/arpstat.asm \ - network/chess:NETWORK/CHESS:$(PROGS)/network/chess/trunk/chess.asm \ - network/downloader:NETWORK/DOWNLOADER:$(PROGS)/network/downloader/trunk/downloader.asm \ - network/ethstat:NETWORK/ETHSTAT:$(PROGS)/network/ethstat/trunk/ethstat.asm \ - network/ftps:NETWORK/FTPS:$(PROGS)/network/ftps/trunk/FTPS.ASM \ - network/https:NETWORK/HTTPS:$(PROGS)/network/https/trunk/https.asm \ - network/nntpc:NETWORK/NNTPC:$(PROGS)/network/nntpc/trunk/nntpc.asm \ - network/nslookup:NETWORK/NSLOOKUP:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/network/examples/nslookup.asm \ - network/popc:NETWORK/POPC:$(PROGS)/network/popc/trunk/popc.asm \ - network/smtps:NETWORK/SMTPS:$(PROGS)/network/smtps/trunk/smtps.asm \ - network/stackcfg:NETWORK/STACKCFG:$(PROGS)/network/stackcfg/trunk/stackcfg.asm \ - network/telnet:NETWORK/TELNET:$(PROGS)/network/telnet/trunk/telnet.asm \ - network/tftpc:NETWORK/TFTPC:$(PROGS)/network/tftpc/trunk/tftpc.asm \ - network/VNCclient:NETWORK/VNCclient:$(PROGS)/network/VNCclient/VNCclient.asm \ - network/ym:NETWORK/YM:$(PROGS)/network/ym/trunk/ym.asm \ - network/zeroconf:NETWORK/ZEROCONF:$(PROGS)/network/zeroconf/trunk/zeroconf.asm \ + network/arpcfg:NETWORK/ARPCFG:$(PROGS)/network/arpcfg/arpcfg.asm \ + network/ping:NETWORK/PING:$(PROGS)/network/icmp/ping.asm \ + network/netcfg:NETWORK/NETCFG:$(PROGS)/network/netcfg/netcfg.asm \ + network/netstat:NETWORK/NETSTAT:$(PROGS)/network/netstat/netstat.asm \ + network/nslookup:NETWORK/NSLOOKUP:$(PROGS)/network/nslookup/nslookup.asm \ + network/synergyc:NETWORK/SYNERGYC:$(PROGS)/network/synergyc/synergyc.asm \ + network/tcpserv:NETWORK/TCPSERV:$(PROGS)/network/tcpserv/tcpserv.asm \ + network/telnet:NETWORK/TELNET:$(PROGS)/network/telnet/telnet.asm \ + network/zeroconf:NETWORK/ZEROCONF:$(PROGS)/network/zeroconf/zeroconf.asm \ + network/ftpd:NETWORK/FTPD:$(PROGS)/network/ftpd/ftpd.asm \ + network/tftpc:NETWORK/TFTPC:$(PROGS)/network/tftpc/tftpc.asm \ + network/ircc:NETWORK/IRCC:$(PROGS)/network/ircc/ircc.asm \ # end of list # The list of all FASM programs with one main FASM file for CD image. # Format of an item is exactly the same as in the previous list. @@ -298,7 +305,7 @@ OTHER_FILES:=autorun.dat:AUTORUN.DAT \ media/ImgF/cEdg.obj:MEDIA/ImgF/cEdg.obj \ media/ImgF/dither.obj:MEDIA/ImgF/dither.obj \ media/ImgF/invSol.obj:MEDIA/ImgF/invSol.obj \ - network/jmail:NETWORK/JMAIL network/zeroconf.ini:NETWORK/ZEROCONF.INI \ + network.ini:NETWORK.INI \ #end of list # Generate skins list understandable by gnu make diff --git a/data/sp/autorun.dat b/data/sp/autorun.dat index a53468d052..c5914a45b8 100644 --- a/data/sp/autorun.dat +++ b/data/sp/autorun.dat @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ #/RD/1/COMMOUSE "" 1 # COM mice detector #/RD/1/DEVELOP/BOARD "" 1 # Load DEBUG board #/RD/1/refrscrn "" 1 # Refresh screen +/RD/1/NETWORK/NETCFG A 1 # /RD/1/NETWORK/ZEROCONF "" 1 # Network configuration /RD/1/MEDIA/PALITRA "H 007DCEDF 003C427F" 1 #SET BG /RD/1/@PANEL "" 1 # Start panel diff --git a/data/sp/menu.dat b/data/sp/menu.dat index db199d62fe..0b597be99d 100644 --- a/data/sp/menu.dat +++ b/data/sp/menu.dat @@ -128,27 +128,19 @@ Hex-Editor /rd/1/develop/heed #15 **** RED **** Servidores > /@16 Clientes > /@17 -Configuraci¢n /rd/1/network/stackcfg -Zero-Config /rd/1/network/zeroconf -Estado /rd/1/network/ethstat -Estado de ARP /rd/1/network/arpstat +Zero-Config /sys/network/zeroconf +network Config /sys/network/netcfg +Network status /sys/network/netstat +ARP status /sys/network/arpcfg #16 **** SERVIDORES **** -SMTPS /rd/1/network/smtps -HTTPS /rd/1/network/https -FTPS /rd/1/network/ftps +FTP daemon /sys/network/ftpd #17 **** CLIENTES **** -Cliente TFTP /rd/1/network/tftpc -Ajedr‚z /rd/1/network/chess -Cliente de descarga /rd/1/network/downloader -Navegador (modo texto) /rd/1/htmlv -Grupos de noticias NNTP /rd/1/network/nntpc -TELNET /rd/1/network/telnet -Correo POP /rd/1/network/popc -IRC /rd/1/network/airc -YAHOO messenger (demo) /rd/1/network/ym -JMail /rd/1/network/jmail -Cliente VNC /rd/1/network/vncclient -Resoluci¢n de nombres /rd/1/network/nslookup +IRC client /sys/network/ircc +TFTP client /sys/network/tftpc +Ping /sys/network/ping +Telnet client /sys/network/telnet +Synergy client /sys/network/synergyc +DNS lookup /sys/network/nslookup #18 **** OTROS **** Reloj anal¢gico /rd/1/demos/aclock Reloj binario /rd/1/demos/bcdclk diff --git a/data/sp/network.ini b/data/sp/network.ini new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e37d2279f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/sp/network.ini @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +[ipconfig] +; type should be static or zeroconf +; zeroconf means the service first tries to contact a DHCP server +; If dhcp is not available, it switches to link-local +type = zeroconf +ip = 192.168.1.150 +gateway = 192.168.1.1 +dns = 192.168.1.1 +subnet = 255.255.255.0 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/sp/network/jmail b/data/sp/network/jmail deleted file mode 100644 index c6091335c2..0000000000 Binary files a/data/sp/network/jmail and /dev/null differ diff --git a/data/sp/network/zeroconf.ini b/data/sp/network/zeroconf.ini deleted file mode 100644 index 39b2aa5948..0000000000 --- a/data/sp/network/zeroconf.ini +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -[ipconfig] -; type should be static or zeroconf -; zeroconf means the service first tries to contact a DHCP server -; If dhcp is not available, it switches to link-local -type = zeroconf -ip = 10.0.2.15 -gateway = 10.0.2.2 -dns = 10.0.2.2 -subnet = 255.255.255.0 -[proxy] -; If Internet connection requires HTTP proxy, set it here -; and uncomment following lines: -;proxy = -;port = -; If proxy requires authentification, uncomment following lines too -; (otherwise, leave them commented): -;user = -;password= -